JP6515746B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, displacement of capable and first group comprising a plurality of displacement means formed, game machine and a second group comprising a plurality of displacement means being variable-position can form Is known (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-176578, A

  However, in the gaming machine described above, it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the size of each displacement means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first group of a plurality of displaceable displacement means and a second group of a plurality of displaceable displacement means. And when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at a first position, a first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and each displacement of the second group When the means is disposed at the second position, the second effect aspect is formed by the respective displacement means of the second group, wherein one displacement means of the first group, and Drive means for applying a driving force to the first member, and for driving the first member to displace the first member. And the combined means is a relative displacement relative to the first member in conjunction with the displacement of the first member Are formed on so that, in the above first position, said switchback means to at least one displacement means of the displacement means of the first group is can abut, in said second position, non-on the switchback means The displacement means of the second group, which are in contact with each other, can be brought into contact with each other, and at least a part of the contact portion of the displacement means of the second group and the combination means overlap Ru is.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to upsize each displacement means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper unit unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper unit unit. It is a front view of an upper unit unit. It is a rear view of an upper unit unit. It is a front view of a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a front view of a lower unit unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a drive arm in a retreat rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a perpendicular rotation position, and a overhang rotation position. It is a partial enlargement front schematic diagram of a drive arm at the time of being rotated from a retreat rotation position to a projection rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising and lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a front view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation member. It is a front view of a rotation member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in a 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotation member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotation member. (A) is a front view of a lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising and lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state, It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state, It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state; ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in a union state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit unit, and a lower unit unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit unit, and a lower unit unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIa direction view of FIG. 65 (a), the upper unit and the lower unit, and (b) is the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 65 (b) It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. 66 (a), upper unit and lower unit, and (b) is the slide unit in the arrow LX VIII b direction of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of a transmission gear, (b) is a side view of a transmission gear. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear meshed in a front view, (b) is the state in which the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear was cancelled. It is the schematic diagram seen from the slide unit front. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa line | wire of FIG. 72 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 72 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the main body base member and the transmission gear are in mesh, and (b) is a bottom view of the main body base member due to displacement of the housing member. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state in which the mesh | engagement with the side 1st rack gear and the transmission gear was cancelled | released front view. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXVIa-LXXVIa line of FIG. 75 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXVIb-LXXVIb line of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of a base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the model which looked at the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear meshed is a front view, and (b) is the tooth engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear released. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state of being seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in a 5th embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in a state after the switching plate is operated It is a schematic diagram. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state after the switching plate is operated is there. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXXVa-LXXXVa line of FIG. 84 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 84 (a). It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 93 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. (C) is a schematic cross section of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. (C) is a schematic cross section of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering unit, (c) is a side view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is an operation unit in the united state. (A) is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the CIIa-CIIa line of FIG. 101, (b) is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the CIIb-CIIb line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the drive in a state where the drive in the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and (b) is in a state where the drive is disposed at the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 2, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to create more refreshingness, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 has a winning. The pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful in the lottery (a jackpot lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (in a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 by increasing the probability of hitting a second symbol to be described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 140 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally medium is a gaming state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased) which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction.

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized part 140a is in the open state (opened state), the second winning opening 140 is compared to the case where the first motorized part 140a is closed (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 or changing the opening time thereof during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized prize 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 140 a may be changed. In addition, during a definite change or during a short time, the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, or the first motorized symbol 140a and the second motorized symbol 82 are opened at one time. The number of times it does not occur may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol using a passage of a ball of the first through gate 66 as a trigger And a second symbol display device (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol of “o” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) and a symbol of “x” for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first motorized prize 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the definite change and during the short hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 140a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at 140 and the third winning opening, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized steering wheel 140a with respect to the game player may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board among the balls launched to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gate 66, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Also in), it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). . Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 140 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 140 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won to the second prize opening 140 may be set to five.

  The second winning opening 140 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 140a. The first motorized prize 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first motorized prize 140a is in the closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first motorized symbol 140a is The ball is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first motorized accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motor-operated part 140a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second winning opening 140 as compared to normal time or during a definite change.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the ball has won the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motorized prize 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases where the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 140 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the first through gate 66, the first motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 140 is won. The ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140 as well as opening the first motorized prize 140a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (is it in the process of being changed, is in the middle of a short time, is in the normal state). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 475, 476.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. As shown in FIG. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are respectively at retracted positions. In FIG. 8, the left slide member 430 is slidingly displaced toward the right slide member 450 and the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are displaced to the extended position in FIG. 8 from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the raising and lowering member 820 are displaced to the extended position is illustrated in FIG. 9 from the state illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper combining unit 500, a lower combining unit 600, The protruding unit 700 and the lifting and lowering unit 800 are rotatably accommodated.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The slide unit 400 has a base member 410 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape and disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion is slidably displaceable on the base member 410. Left slide member 430 and right slide member 450, and each slide member 430 is independently provided in the left and right direction on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81). An effect of slidingly displacing in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be implemented.

  In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed to be able to abut, but in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 abut, they are broken. A restraining structure is employed. Details of the structure will be described later.

  In the lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a guide member 419 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape is disposed in a posture parallel to the base member 410, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The lower end of each of the slide members 430 and 450 is slid and guided between the facings of the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 when it is slid in the left-right direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the lower end side of each slide member 430, 450 shakes back and forth.

  The upper combination unit 500 includes a base member 510 which is disposed in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400 and has a rectangular front view rectangular shape, and an upper displacement member 530 which is disposed displaceably on the base member 510. On the other hand, lower united unit 600 includes base member 610 having a substantially L shape in a front view disposed on the left side portion and the lower side portion of opening 301 a of bottom wall portion 301 of rear case 300, and lower base member 610. And a lower displacing member 640 disposed displaceably.

  The upper displacing member 530 is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301 a of the back case 300, and the lower displacing member 640. Is displaceably formed between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When it is projected to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (the upper abutment portion 533 and the lower abutment portion 643) of the two displacement members 530 and 640 abut (join) each other.

  In this case, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 displaced in the direction approaching each other are in contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable, for example, they may bounce back. In the present embodiment, a structure for suppressing such an impact at the time of contact is employed. Details of the structure will be described later.

  The projecting unit 700 includes a base member 710 which is disposed in a lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and which has a rectangular shape in a front view, and elevating and lowering members disposed on the base member 710. The elevation base 720 includes a base 720 and a rotation member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevation base 720. The elevation base 720, together with the rotation member 730, retracts to the front side of the base member 710. It can be displaced (lifted) between an overhanging position projecting toward the front side of the opening 301a.

  Further, the projecting unit 700 is provided with a projecting member 735 disposed so as to be able to slide in and out (sliding displacement) to the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 pivotably provided to the rotating member 730, and the projecting members 735 and And a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) for driving the swing member 732.

  The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by one drive motor 763. Therefore, since the driving force necessary for driving the projecting member 735 and the driving force necessary for the swinging member 732 overlap, the load becomes large and there is a possibility that the durability of the drive motor 763 may be deteriorated. In the embodiment, a structure for suppressing the load of the drive motor 763 is employed. Such a structure will be described later.

  The lifting unit 800 includes a base member 810 which is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500 and which is rectangular in a front view rectangular shape, and a lifting member 820 which is disposed on the base member 810 so as to be able to move up and down. The raising and lowering member 820 is displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301 a of the back case 300.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12 show the state in which the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a slide rod disposed on the base member 410. Sliding displacement of the member 420 and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 along the slide rod member 420 And a drive mechanism for driving the motor.

  The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the slide rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-like projecting plate portion 411 horizontally protrudes from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420) And the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the projecting plate 411. As shown in FIG.

  The slide rod member 420 is a metal rod-like body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the slide holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. These slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. The sliding rod member 420 is fixed at its both ends to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

  The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extended along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed respectively.

  The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side in which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged. A front view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front view rectangular vertically long base member 434 suspended downward from the tip end side of the second member 433, and a front side side of the base member 434 Transmission member for transmitting movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotation member 435. And gears 437a to 437f.

  The first member 431 is provided with a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. The sliding rod member 420 can slide (slide) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction). That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the slide rod member 420.

  A first side rack gear 431 a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear engaged with a left drive gear 471 described later, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, its rotational movement is converted to linear movement by the first side rack gear 431 a, and the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420. Ru.

  In addition, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (axially supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (front side of the first member 431) The cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in a front view is disposed on the lower surface of the cover. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed in a state of being provided behind the cover 431 b.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidingly displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when it is slidingly displaced relative to the base member 410, the first side member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 in accordance with the sliding displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

  The second member 433 is disposed (connected) displaceably to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip end side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The slide hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

  In this case, a second side rack gear 433 a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 433, and the second side rack gear 433 a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into linear motion by the second side rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is A driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 433 is higher than that of the first member 431. Can.

  A left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be in contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed such that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. Ru.

  The right slide member 450 is rotatable to the front side of the base member 454 and the rack member 451 having a rectangular shape in the front view rectangular shape, the base member 454 having a rectangular shape in the front view rectangular shape suspended downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. To transmit the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are mainly provided.

  The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section on the base end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole Thus, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the slide rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A rack gear 451 a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidingly displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

  The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported in front of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 engaged with the drive gears 471 and 472 respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the respective pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

  The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are respectively meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). Therefore, the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are rotationally driven by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby via the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

  A cover member 416 is disposed on the front of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471, 472 and the pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. . The drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, an insertion hole is bored in the cover member 416, and the drive shaft of each drive motor 475, 476 is connected to each pinion gear 473, 474 through the insertion hole.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotation members 435 and 455 in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

  FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded back perspective view of the left slide member 430.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the base member 434 is provided (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434 a connected to the second member 433 and the back side base member 434 a. The transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a circular axial support hole 434b1 in a front view.

  As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and they are connected (engaged) in series. A gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the top and the transmission gear 437f at the rear.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is engaged with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 is coaxially fixed to the trailing transmission gear 437f.

  Therefore, by sliding the left slide member 430 (base member 434) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotary member 435 can be rotated by the transmission of the rear transmission gear 437f through the transmission gears 437b to 437e.

  The rotation member 435 includes a rotation shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion serving as a rotation shaft when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as to be non-relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 435 is rotated relative to the base member 434 by rotating the transmission gear 437f.

  The support shaft 435 b rotatably supports the displacement member 436 rotatably on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the pivot hole 436 a of the displacement member 436. In addition, the E ring is fitted in the fitting groove recessedly provided at the front-end | tip of the support shaft 435b, and the removal prevention of the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is formed.

  The displacement member 436 is a member disposed displaceably on the back side of the rotation member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a relief hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435 b of the rotation member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436 a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 435.

  The relief hole 436 b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axial center of the pivotal support hole 436 a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width thereof is of the rotating member 435 The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the support hole 436a) with respect to the rotation member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 with the rotation member 435 is possible. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear inscribed along a circumferential surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rear surface of the rotating member 435, and the pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is engaged with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated relative to the rotation member 435 in one direction or the other with the support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as a rotation center. It can be done.

  In this case, the rotational member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose dimension in the length direction is large relative to the dimension in the width direction, and the position where the rotating member 435 is approximately the center in the length direction and the width direction The rotation shaft 435a is disposed at The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed in the shape which divided the rotation member 435 into substantially 2 by the center of the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the pivot hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center, the displacement member 436 is concealed on the back side of the rotation member 435 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. Can.

  Further, in the rotating member 435, the drive motor 441 is disposed on the opposite side to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 The position of the center of gravity can be close to the rotation axis 435 a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the pivotal support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed at 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435 a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visible to the side of the rotation member 435), Because of the overhang of the displacement member 436, the center of gravity of the above-described structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotation member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

  That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stop state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435). When the displacement member 436 is positioned on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 (it is rotated in one direction), so that the above-described rotation action by the weight of the structure The rotation can be assisted. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and slide displacement from the stopped state of the left slide member 430 can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction at the start of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (ie, rotation of the rotation member 435). If the displacement member 436 is hidden on the back surface of the rotation member 435 (it is rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (coincident with) the rotation shaft 435a. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load (see FIG. 11) of the left drive motor 475. Thereby, the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be smoothly started.

  Further, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) stops. In the case of being positioned on the side where the rotation is performed, the rotation can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. Thus, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped promptly.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded back perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. In the front side base member 454b, a pivotal support hole 454b1 having a circular shape in a front view is bored.

  As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and they are connected (engaged) in series. A gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the top and the transmission gear 457f at the rear.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a meshes with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotating member 455 is coaxially fixed to the trailing transmission gear 457f.

  Therefore, by sliding the right slide member 450 (base member 454) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotating member 455 can be rotated by the transmission to the rear transmission gear 457f through the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

  The rotation member 455 includes a rotation shaft 455a and a support shaft 455b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion serving as a rotation shaft when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454. The rotation shaft 455a is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 455 is rotated relative to the base member 454 by rotating the transmission gear 457f.

  The support shaft 455 b rotatably supports the displacement member 456 rotatably on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456 a of the displacement member 456. Note that the E ring is fitted in a fitting groove recessed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, whereby the displacement member 456 is prevented from coming off the support shaft 455b.

  The displacement member 456 is a member disposed displaceably on the back side of the rotation member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a relief hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455 b of the rotation member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456 a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 455.

  The relief hole 456 b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axial center of the pivotal support hole 456 a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width thereof is of the rotating member 455 The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b, and displacement with the rotation member 455 is made. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear inscribed along a circumferential surface centering on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the rear surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 461. The pinion gear 452 is engaged with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 455 with the support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as a rotation center. It can be done.

  In this case, the rotary member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose dimension in the length direction is large relative to the dimension in the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is disposed at the other end side. In addition, since the displacement member 456 is disposed on the rotation member 455 on the opposite side of the drive motor 461 with respect to the support shaft 455 b, the rotation member 455 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455. The position of the center of gravity can be disposed at a position eccentric to one end of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

  Therefore, at the start of slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By positioning on the side, the weight of the structure can be exerted in the direction of rotating the structure itself. Thereby, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and slide displacement from the stop state of the right slide member 450 can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 455) is stopped, the gravity center of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side displaced upward in the gravity direction. It is possible to make it easy to stop the rotation of the structure value. Thus, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped promptly.

  Further, as described later, the right slide member 450 is retracted by the left slide member 430 (first member 431) coming into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (FIG. 10 right side) When the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is located on the side which is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance, and the cushioning effect by the rotation of the structure value is exerted. It can be done.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIGS. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and the transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid is illustrated. FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrate a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in a state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction to the maximum, and the base member 434 is movable. It is disposed at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the positive direction from this state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a. 17 (a) slide toward the right slide member 450).

  In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are disposed to face each other in a mutually parallel posture, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slide-displaced with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a. Is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), the second member 433 which has a slide displacement speed faster than that of the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 against the first member 431 The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 further moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 (in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18A). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the extended position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the reverse direction opposite to that described above from the state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position. The first member 431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (the left direction in FIG. 18A, the direction away from the right slide member 450) by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a. .

  Also in this case, as in the case described above, the operation of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 Thus, the second member 433 is slidingly displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and the first member 431 is advanced. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended more than the entire length in the extended position).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further separated from the base member 410 in the left direction (FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extending direction at maximum relative to the first member 431, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17A). (A) It is disposed at the position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, in the overhanging position.

  In the present embodiment, a detection target is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detection is disposed on the base member 410 (all not shown). In this case, when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is disposed at the retracted position, the detection sensor is disposed at a position at which the detection portion of the second member 431 can be detected. When the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when stopping the drive of the left drive motor 475 at the overhang position, cumulative addition of the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches the predetermined value, the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movable range (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 has a portion overlapping the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of the two can be enlarged to enhance the rendering effect.

  However, when the movable range is overlapped in this manner, the control defect (for example, Due to the occurrence of the error of the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps, the left slide member 430 which is slide-displaced to the extended position abuts against the right slide member 450, which may cause breakage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be suppressed while securing the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

  That is, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 supported by the first member 431 act as a second member. The base member 434 can be slide-displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed of the 433 is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (the rotation member 435 and the Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement can be secured.

  On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 causes the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 to abut on the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of the contact can be weakened to suppress the breakage of both.

  In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is kept on standby (stopped) on the side closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is moved toward the extended position. At the same time, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450 and the right slide member 450 is pushed by the left slide member 430 in the direction of slide displacement to effect the slide displacement of both in an integral state. be able to. Also in this case, since the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 can be made to abut on the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), The impact of both can be reduced to prevent both from being damaged.

  The right slide member 450 is disposed slidably on the base member 410, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, in a state where the right slide member 450 is disposed at a position capable of coming into contact with the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the direction away from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18 (a) has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right), and the direction in which the right sliding member 450 can slide can be changed to the left sliding member 430 when the left sliding member 430 is abutted. It is considered to be in the direction to allow the slide displacement of

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 abuts on the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (retracted backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, the buffer action can be exhibited (see FIG. 18 (b)). As a result, breakage of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the directions of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are made parallel, when the left slide member 430 abuts on the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 is produced. It is possible to make the fleeing operation smoothly. Therefore, the buffer action can be reliably exerted, and the breakage of both can be easily suppressed.

  Further, in this case, by sharing the slide rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of the slide displacements of the both are made parallel, so the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are juxtaposed with different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. In that case, the space is increased, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved by using the two slide members 430 and 450 as one slide bar member 420.

  As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (right side in FIG. 18A). It can be disposed at a position where it abuts. That is, a state in which the left slide member 430 is not in contact with the right slide member 450 can be formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slidingly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variation and control failure. When the right slide member 450 is positively abutted against the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper) and the slide position of the left slide member 430 is moved relatively slowly, it is easy to make the stop position coincide with the target position Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 in a position not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of times of contact can be reduced, and fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the service life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

  Here, in order to accelerate the second member 433 relative to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 separately provides these two members 431 and 433 and also the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. Since it is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a and the like, and the number of parts and the sliding portion increase, the weight and the driving resistance become large. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

  In particular, at the time of the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when the slide displacement is started from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized by the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement may be inhibited.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed to be able to abut on the left slide member 430, and the direction in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position (FIG. 18 (a 2.) It is formed so as to be slidably displaceable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial movement of the left slide member 430 (the movement to start slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thus, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slide-displaced from the stop state. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the initial operation (initial speed) and improve the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement.

  Further, the right slide member 450 abuts on the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 when it is slidingly displaced in the direction to push the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A). (The first member 431 is pushed back), the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be enhanced.

  That is, the right slide member 450 abuts against the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is slower than that of the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and pushes back the first member 431. The time during which the assisting force is applied to the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (ie, after the start of pushing back the left slide member 430 in the stopped state), the velocity of the left slide member 430 exceeds the velocity of the right slide member 450 The time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be enhanced.

  Here, a mechanism (the left pinion gear 473, the left drive gear 471, and the first side rack gear 431a) that slides the left slide member 430 (first member 431) by converting the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion. And the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion to slide the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The gears of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a) The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

  In the present embodiment, since the left pinion gear 473 and the first side rack gear 431a are formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first rack gear 431a, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the same as that of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, when the gear ratio is large, the displacement of the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) in the direction of the slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the quantity is large.

  Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be easily slide-displaced from the stopped state quickly, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement.

  That is, by setting the gear ratio in the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited, so the force by which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430 is strengthened. Thus, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state.

  On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased, and accordingly, The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, the improvement of the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement can be aimed at.

  When the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced to smoothly perform the initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) of the left slide member 430, the initial operation becomes smooth, but the end of the initial operation In the later steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased to increase the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. Initial operation (start of slide displacement from stop state) is inhibited (become slower). That is, the compatibility between performing the initial operation of the left slide member 430 smoothly and increasing the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation is Such a combination of the right slide member 450 and the left slide member 430 is possible for the first time because the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30, the detailed configurations of the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 will be described. First, the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19 (a) is a front view of the upper combining unit 500, and FIG. 19 (b) is a rear view of the upper combining unit 500. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper unit unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded back perspective view of the upper unit unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates the upper displacement member 530 in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combination unit 500 is connected to a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in an inner space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rear base 511 having a rectangular front view rectangular shape, and a front base 512 having a rectangular front view rectangular shape disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511, and the rear base 511 and the front base The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the opposed surfaces 512 (internal space).

  The rear surface base 511 includes a connection hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side And a support shaft 511 c inserted into the guide groove 522 of 520.

  The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

  The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacing member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacing member 530 is displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, As the guide pin 532 is slid along the guide hole 511b, the attitude (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed.

  The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft supporting hole 521 which is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It has a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 cut along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

  The support shaft 511 c of the back surface base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511 c of the back surface base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is supported by the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is It is parallel to the extending direction of the connection hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of the slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined in the extending direction of the connection hole 511 a of the back surface base 511.

  The upper displacement member 530 is provided with a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 which are provided to project from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section and rotatably supported by the pivot hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511 a of the back surface base 511, and the guide pin 532 is of the back surface base 511. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section which is slid along the guide hole 511b.

  A collar C1 having a diameter larger than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the distal ends of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532, respectively. . Further, an upper contact portion 533 is formed on the side surface of the upper displacement member 530. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that is in contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and on the side surface (tip end side) opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532. It is formed.

  The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported at the front of the rear surface base 511, a pinion gear 542 engaged with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 having a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542; Prepare. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connection hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

  Next, the operation of the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 are a front view and a back view of the upper unit unit 500, and the transition state when the upper displacing member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 23A, in the state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are one end side of the connection hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. The upper displacing member 530 is disposed in a state of forming a horizontal posture and being hidden behind the base member 510, as shown in FIG.

  From this state, when the drive motor 543 is driven in the positive direction, the connection shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connection hole 511a in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, and the guide pin 532 is guided by the guide hole 511b. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacing member 530 is horizontally inclined (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531) as shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b). It is displaced to. That is, the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

  When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in the horizontal direction while being further inclined obliquely (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), a vertical posture in which the tip side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward is formed. That is, it is disposed at the overhanging position (first position).

  Next, the lower combining unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower combining unit 600. FIG. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combining unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combining unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows the lower displacement member 640 in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, lower unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of base member 610, and a base end of drive arm holding member 620. Attached to the drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, the lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, the connection arm 650 which couples the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and the drive arm 630. A biasing spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

  The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shaped front view, and a projecting base 611 which is provided to project from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shaped member And a connecting shaft 612. The protruding base portion 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where it protrudes from the front surface of the base member 610 (bulked to the front side), and along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610 It is provided in a projecting manner.

  The drive arm holding member 620 is a back side holding member 621 disposed on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 disposed on (covering) the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

  The drive arm holding member 620 is disposed on the tip end of the projection base 611 of the base member 610 on the back surface side of the rear side holding member 621, and therefore, the projection height of the projection base 611 is equal to A predetermined space can be formed between the rear surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (rear surface holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the retracted position is formed so as to be accommodated in the space, the outer shape of the lower combination unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

  The drive arm 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along the outer peripheral surface of a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a cylindrical portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. A long member having a gear portion 632 and a connection hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear portion 632 and in which the axial support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

  The lower displacing member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 protruding from the front side. The drive arm connection shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section circularly coupled to the connection hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connection hole 651 of the connection arm 650. It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced relative to the base member 610 by the rotation of the drive arm 630.

  In the lower displacement member 640, a lower contact portion 643 is formed on the side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that is in contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface of the side separated to the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

  The connection arm 650 includes connection holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610 are connected to the connection holes 651 and 652. Are connected rotatably. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced relative to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the connection arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is set to the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as a center arc shape.

  The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring and causes one leg extending from the winding portion to engage with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg to engage with the drive arm 630. Is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position toward the extended position. That is, when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsion deformation) of the biasing spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to be displaced. 27A is biased in the rotational direction (rightward rotation in FIG. 27A) for displacing 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation in the extension direction of the lower displacement member 640 can be smoothly performed.

  The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c disposed inside drive arm holding member 620, and a drive shaft connected to transmission gear 671a and is disposed on the front of drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). A drive motor 672 is provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and by connecting (engaging) in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the top and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. A gear train (gear train) is formed.

  The rear transmission gear 671 c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671 c acts on the gear portion 632 to rotate the drive arm 630.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the lower combining unit 600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower combining unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is maximally rotated counterclockwise in a front view (FIG. 27A left rotation direction) It is positioned at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “retracted rotational position”), and is inclined downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, the axial support hole 631) to the distal end side (connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the position where the horizontal position is at the leftmost position (the position spaced farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, left in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is at the lowermost position. It is disposed at a position where it is most separated from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, that is, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a).

  When the drive motor 672 is driven in the positive direction from this state, the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacing member 640 is near the drive arm 630 as shown in FIG. 27 (b) as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise. Of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27A).

  When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further moved along with the clockwise rotation of the drive arm 630 as viewed from the front. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connection arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the extended position.

  In the extended position, the drive arm 630 is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “overhanging rotational position”) which is maximally rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (the right rotation direction in FIG. 27C). In the rotational position, the drive arm 630 is disposed such that the distal end side (connection hole 633) is beyond the vertical line passing through the proximal end side (rotation center, i.e., the pivot hole 631). In addition, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted up. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position spaced farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, right side in FIG. 27C), and the vertical position is the uppermost ( It is disposed at a position farthest away in the vertical direction from the retracted position, a position slightly lower from FIG. 27 (a)).

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the displacement speed of the lower combining unit 600 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotational position, the horizontal rotational position, the vertical rotational position, and the projecting rotational position. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position.

  Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotational position and the extended rotational position, but in the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotational position and the horizontal attitude of the drive arm 630 is achieved. The rotational position at which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction is referred to as “horizontal rotational position” and rotates by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotational position. The rotational position at which the drive arm 630 is in a standing posture (a posture in which an imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support holes 631 and the connection holes 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as "vertical rotation position". The overhanging rotational position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotational position.

  In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

  The driving state (power supply) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and hence the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transition period until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation from the stop state is sufficiently small, and there is no transient response.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), the drive arm 630 axially supports the connection hole 633 in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1). The connection hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated downward from the retracted position toward the horizontal rotation position, so that the speed V of the connection hole 633 (the arc shape of the connection hole 633 The tangential velocity) in the displacement trajectory of (1) is such that the upward velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually increased and maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and its upward velocity is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 axially supports the connection hole 633. The connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is inclined from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, so that the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is directed upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward velocity thereof is gradually reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle .theta.3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633. Since the connection hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position toward the vertical rotation position, the velocity V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

  As described above, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position, as described later, because the velocity component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. When being used, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 are rebounded to each other, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (a) to 29 (d), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of the angle θ2), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right It will be gradually increased.

  Accordingly, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced toward the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1) in the vicinity of the connection hole 633, while the displacement direction is horizontal The position is reversed at the rotational position, and in a section between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (range of the angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (in the direction toward the retracted position).

  That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at the leftmost end (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed, and the right It can be horizontally displaced in an accelerated state gradually toward the direction. As a result, an operation of bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be revealed, and an effect can be performed in which a dynamic feeling is given to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section (range of angle θ1) in which the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is decreased, the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is increased while the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is increased (angle In the range of θ 2), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, so that the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player feels the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 stronger. You can make an impression.

  On the other hand, as described above, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of the angle θ2 in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) the upper displacement member 530 In the configuration in which the speed component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0), the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased, so the lower displacement member can be displaced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement. The effect 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect can be secured.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacing member 640 has the connecting arm 650 at a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (the driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the driving arm 630. As it is connected, the upper part of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced rightward with the rotation around the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. . Therefore, as described above, when the operation for bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction appears, the operation for bending and extending is enlarged by the amount of horizontal displacement to the right with the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be made larger. Moreover, instead of the upward displacement, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward), the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce an effect Can be secured easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an abutment (merging) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacing member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The upper contact portion 533 is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory, and is disposed at the overhanging position in a state in which the vertical posture with its tip end side (upper contact portion 533) directed downward is formed. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position where the horizontal position is at the leftmost position and the vertical position is at the lowermost position. It is placed at the exit position.

  As a result, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 disposed at the overhanging position are united in a state in which the upper abutting portion 533 and the lower abutting portion 643 abut. Thus, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's trunk, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. Thus, a jumping horse character is formed at the retracted position.

  Here, when the descending upper displacing member 530 and the ascending lower displacing member 640 are abutted in the retracted position, the impact generated at the time of the abutment causes them to bounce back in the direction of separating from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, when the displacement speed of the upper displacing member 530 and the displacing member 640 is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of abutment, the time until the two displacing members 530, 640 are integrated to form one character Is bulky and protracted, so the effect of the presentation is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacing member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacing member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacing member 640 Since the component Vv is decreased when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacing member 640 abuts on the upper displacing member 530. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 bounce back in the direction which mutually estranges, and can stabilize the attitude | position of these both displacement members 530 and 640.

  In addition, since the decrease of the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in the section from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. The velocity component Vv directed upward can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form one character, and it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connection hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (connection hole 633). Is configured to gradually reduce the upward velocity component Vv, so that the decrease in the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is determined by setting the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the extended rotational position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position, the velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 in the vertical direction is directed downward (in a direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

  As a result, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are brought into contact with each other in the retracted position, the lower displacing member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacing member 530. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it can suppress that both displacement members 530 and 640 bounce in the direction mutually estranged, and can stabilize those attitudes.

  Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 becomes a negative value. By adopting the configuration, even if displacement occurs at the position where contact (merging) occurs due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances or control variations in the drive mechanism of lower displacing member 640 or upper displacing member 530, etc. Since the range in which the velocity component Vv directed upward of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, the upper displacement member 530 can be easily brought into contact with the region within a range where the impact can be suppressed.

  Next, the protruding unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded back perspective view of the projecting unit 700. FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

  Protruding unit 700 has a base member 710, an elevating base 720 disposed movably up and down on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotation member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 are mainly provided.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 33, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in a front view substantially at the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 protruding from the front, And two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771 a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. In addition, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported by the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported by the support shafts 713 and 714 on the back surface. .

  The lifting base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the back base 721, and the back base 721 and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance on the lifting base 720 by the thickness dimension of the middle base 723, and the rotating member 730 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably accommodated (disposed).

  The back surface base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via slide rails SL at one side in the width direction. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is disposed in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is provided between the proximal rail disposed on the front of the base member 710, the distal rail disposed on the rear of the lift base 720 (rear base 721), and the proximal rail and the distal rail. And an intermediate rail provided to allow relative displacement of the proximal rail and the distal rail relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by elevating the slide rail SL, the lift base 720 can be raised and lowered along the vertical direction with respect to the base member 710.

  The rear surface base 721 of the lifting base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotation member 730. The opening is formed. The slide pin 719 b of the connection arm 719 is slidably inserted into the slide groove 721 a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connection arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the slide pin 719b of the connection arm 719 is slid along the slide groove 721a, whereby the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721) is moved up and down. Ru.

  The connection arm 719 protrudes from a front surface of a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710 and an end portion opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. And a driven groove 719c linearly extending along a direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . The drive pin 771 b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719 c via the collar C. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connection arm 719 is rotated about the pivotal support hole 719a.

  The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 in which a rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and to the lead transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive disposed on the front of the base member 710 A motor 773 is provided.

  The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a gear group for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. The transmission gears 772a are at the top by connecting (engaging) in series. To form a gear train (gear train) with a tail.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force transmits the leading end. The power is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the standing direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the pivot 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the top (projecting position) (FIG. 21 (c). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state (see FIG. 21C) in which the elevating base 720 is disposed at the uppermost side (projected position), the rotational drive force is the transmission gear at the head. The transmission gear 772d is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) about the pivot hole 719a as a rotation center, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a). )reference).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lift base 720 will be described.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the lifting and lowering base 720 and the rotating member 730, and a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the lifting and lowering base 720 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a back base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end sides of the back base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. The rotary member 731a is rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722 by the rotary shaft 731a being pivotally supported by the support hole 721b of the rear base 721.

  The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b disposed on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear cut along a circumferential surface having a central angle of about 90 degrees centered on the axial center of the rotation shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is engaged. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 730 is rotated relative to the lift base 720 by rotating the transmission gear 781a.

  The driving mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 includes transmission gears 781 a and 781 b rotatably held between the back base 721 and the middle base 723 in the elevation base 720 and a transmission gear 781 b. The drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

  Here, in a state in which the transmission gear 781a is engaged with the circumferential center of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of the slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projection or retraction at the time of It arrange | positions in the rotation position (Hereinafter, it calls "the center rotation position") (refer FIG.36 (b)).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotational position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36 (b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the sliding displacement direction of the projecting member 735 is inclined to one side (right side in FIG. 36C) (see FIG. 36C).

  From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is It is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) about the rotation center 731a. As a result, after passing through the central rotation position, the rotation member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the projection member 735 is inclined to the other (left side in FIG. 36A) (see FIG. 36A). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the rotation member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded back perspective view of the rotation member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotation member 730, and shows a transition state when the projecting member 735 is protruded and retracted from the rotation member 730 and the rocking member 732 is rocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a back surface base 731, a swinging member 732 swingably provided on the front surface of the back surface base 731, and the swinging member 732 and the back surface base 731. , A front base 734 disposed on the front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 slidably disposed on the back of the front base 734, and the front base And 734 and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear surface base 731.

  The rear surface base 731 is formed in a container shape having a substantially circular front view with an open front, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (upper outer peripheral wall) is missing, and the bottom from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing A part of the wall projects upwards. As described above, the back surface of the back surface base 731 is curved to be engaged with the rotation shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731 b is provided.

  Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732 and a tip end of the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 are slidably inserted in the rear surface base 731. A pair of guide holes 731 d and a slide hole 731 e through which the slide pin 733 b of the interposed member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

  The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in a circular arc about the axial center of the shaft support hole 731c. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the acting shaft 732d of the rocking member 732 along the guide hole 731d, it is possible to rock (rotate) the rocking member 732 such that the tip side moves up and down.

  The slide hole 731 e is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, the axis of the rotation shaft 731 a is positioned on the extension line in the extending direction, and the slide hole 734 a of the front base 734 described later It is formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support holes 731c and the guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide holes 731e.

  The swinging member 732 includes a rotary shaft 732a and a working shaft 732b formed as a cylindrical shaft, and the base end sides on which the rotary shaft 732a and the working shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732 a is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 731 c of the back surface base 731, and the operated shaft 732 b is slidably inserted into the action hole 733 a of the interposition member 733 and the guide hole 731 d of the back surface base 731. Be done.

  The collar C is fastened and fixed to the end of the rotary shaft 732a, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the rotary shaft 732a, and the body of the collar C has the rotary shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between. Similarly, a collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the acting shaft 732d, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the acting shaft 732d, and the body of the collar C serves as the acting shaft 732d and the guide hole It is slidably interposed between 731 d and the action hole 733 a.

  The interposing member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swinging member 732 and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action holes 733a are holes for transmitting the vertical movement (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposed member 733 to the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 and in a direction in which a pair is in the shape of a front view C. Arranged in line symmetry.

  As described later, when the interposed member 733 is raised (sliding upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes the operated shaft 732b upward, and the pivoting member 732 lifts the tip end thereof. When the interposed member 733 is lowered (sliding downward) while it is swung (rotated) to the lower side, the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes the operated shaft 732b downward, and the swinging member 732 It is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

  The slide pin 733 b is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposed member 733. In addition, it is disposed on the symmetry line of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the interposing member 733 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731 via the slide pin 733 b.

  The sliding wall 733c is formed to project from the front of the interposing member 733 as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the interposing member 733), The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is in contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c) In accordance with the change (increase or decrease) of, the interposing member 733 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward). That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, and when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

  An urging spring 791 formed of a metal coil spring is interposed between the rear surface base 731 and the interposed member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , Acting as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (displacement displacement downward) the interposing member 733. That is, the lowering (slide displacement downward) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the weight of the interposed member 733). As a result, as described later, the rocking (rotation) of the rocking member 732 in the tilting direction (the direction of lowering the tip) can be performed quickly.

  The front base 734 is a plate-like member having a circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the front of the back base 731 (the end face of the outer peripheral wall). The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734 a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed in parallel with the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731.

  The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a slide hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the slide pin 735a is projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , And are disposed along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Thus, the projecting member 735 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

  The slide hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) of the projecting member 735 in the longitudinal direction, and the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted Ru. Therefore, when the driver 761 is rotated and the slide pin 761c is slid along the slide hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 735b is pushed upward or pushed down by the slide pin 761c. As a result, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

  An urging spring 792 formed of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is It acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the projecting member 735.

  The driving mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and rocking) the projecting member 735 and the rocking member 732 includes a driving body 761 rotatably disposed in front of the rear surface base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. A drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e in which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a and the top transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 731 A drive motor 763 is provided.

  The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a portion formed as a disc cam whose curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposing member 733, the interposing member 733 is driven (slidingly displaced). In addition, the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the drive body 761, and as described above, acts on the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 735b of the projection member 735 to project The member 735 is driven (slidingly displaced).

  The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the driving body 761. The transmission gears 762a are at the top by connecting (engaging) in series, and the transmission gear 762e To form a gear train (gear train) with a tail.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is engaged with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761 b is reduced, and the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actionable shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the interposition member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 lowers its tip side by its own weight. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

  In addition, when the above-described driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed up by the slide pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is lifted (sliding upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 39C, the driver 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761 b is increased, and the interposed member 733 is lifted, whereby the acting shaft 732 b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733 a of the interposed member 733 The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacing the tip side thereof upward.

  Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the slide pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is lowered (sliding downward).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, the details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

  Fig.40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange | positioned in a 1st rotation position, FIG.40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd rotation position. is there. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the sliding of the sliding wall 733c and the projecting member 735 of the interposed member 733 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position or the second rotational position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a cam surface that abuts on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) abuts against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  As described above, the sliding wall 733c has a bottom surface (the lower surface in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement of the interposed member 733), FIG. (A) and FIG. 40 (b) are formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposing member 733) is the highest from the top when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  The slide hole 735b has a curved portion 735b1 extending from the one end side (right side in FIG. 40A) of the slide hole 735b to a predetermined range, and the other end of the slide hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed of a straight portion 735b2 extending in the range to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

  The bending portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the driving body 761 in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the slide pin 761c is positioned at one end of the slide hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position toward the second rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, while the slide pin 761 c passes through the bending portion 735 b 1), the drive body 761 slides The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (ie, the projecting member 735). That is, the vertical position of the slide hole 735b is not changed, and therefore, the protruding member 735 is kept stopped at the lowermost position.

  The rotational position at which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position by a predetermined rotational angle (that is, the rotational position at which the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) We call it ".

  The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the projecting member 735, and the left and right direction of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)). Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the projecting member 735) causes the driving body 761 to rotate to the second rotational position by the action of the sliding pin 761c. When it is rotated toward it, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when it is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position (see FIG. 40B), the slide pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, and the predetermined on the linear portion 735b2 It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the bending portion 735 b 1).

  That is, when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end of the straight portion 735b2 After sliding toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 40A) of the dynamic hole 735b, the direction is changed at the end, and the linear portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1 It is stopped just before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735 b 2). As a result, as described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 are front schematic views of the rotation member 730, and the transition state when the projecting member 735 is slid and the rocking member 732 is rocked is illustrated. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotation member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position is as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and the state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the predetermined rotational position is as shown in FIG. Then, in FIG. 42 (b), the state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position is illustrated in the state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position. Be done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, in the state where the driver 761 is disposed at the first rotational position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position, and the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position. Be done. When the driver 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position from this state, the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. (See (a)) The intervening member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and in conjunction with this, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

  On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, as shown in FIG. 41B, the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the slide hole 735b while the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as FIG. 41A).

  When the driving body 761 having reached the predetermined rotational position is further rotated toward the second rotational position (see FIG. 41B), as shown in FIG. 42A, the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is further increased. By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposing member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slidingly displaced upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 with the rotation of the driving body 761. Ru.

  When the driver 761 is rotated to the second rotational position from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2. As a result (see FIG. 40 (b)), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the rocking member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the top by pushing up the straight portion 735b2 to the top by the slide pin 761c.

  In contrast to the case described above, when the driver 761 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the state where the driver 761 is disposed at the second rotational position), FIG. As shown in), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40 (b)), and the interposed member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Accordingly, the pivoting member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slidingly displaced downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 with the rotation of the driving body 761. Ru.

  When the driving member 761 is rotated to the predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1. The upward lifting operation of the mounting member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the pivoting member 732 is also rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the slide pin 761c.

  When the driving member 761 is rotated to the first rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a) As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposing member 733 is pushed up to the top, and along with this, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the top. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the projection member 735 is at the lowermost position (ie, FIG. It is maintained at the same position as).

  As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the two members (the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735) can be displaced by one drive motor 763.

  Here, in the conventional product, when displacing the two members by the first drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is overlapped, so the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. There was a problem of causing On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced can not be formed, and the rendering effect by the displacement is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (the cam portion 761b and the interposing member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732 The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position), the section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is raised (the driver 761 is The load on the drive motor 763 can be smaller than that in the section to be rotated to the rotational position.

  On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 slides the projecting member 735 downward (second rotation of the driving member 761) Driving the load of the drive motor 763 in the section for rotating from the position to the first rotation position, in the section for sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 upward (section for rotating the driving body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) The load of the motor 763 can be made smaller.

  That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. The second transmission means can have a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be dispersed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and since the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be displaced together, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the rendering effect by the displacement of both members 732 and 735 while aiming.

  The first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means interlocks the projecting member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swinging per unit displacement amount of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The displacement amounts of the member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (power supply) of the drive motor 763 is maintained constant, a change can be given to the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

  Further, this is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (a section in which the driving member 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position) It is formed by providing a downward displacement component, that is, utilizing displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from being complicated. This can reduce the cost of parts. In addition, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 can be easily made constant, and the driving motor 763 The burden can be reduced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the slide pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are separately disposed. Therefore, the rotation member 730 can be miniaturized. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement of the displacement of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position, that is, when the slide displacement of the projecting member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Because the load of is increased, the initial speed is delayed, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the projecting member 735 (sliding hole 735b) from the driver 761 (sliding pin 761c). The transmission of the driving force to) can be non-transmission. Therefore, while the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be accelerated by that amount. The upward slide displacement can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, while the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 (that is, while the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the predetermined rotational position), the projecting member 735 is maintained in the stop state However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction to lower the tip downward (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when swinging the swinging member 732 while maintaining the projecting member 735 in the stop state, it is possible to suppress the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 necessary for the swinging. As a result, since the momentum of the rotation of the driving body 761 can be made stronger, the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

  Further, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung even while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are put in the stopped state. Can be avoided to improve the rendering effect by the displacement.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the driving member 761. Force to smoothly displace the projecting member 735 from the stop state.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the slide pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position, the slide pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is at a predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1) It is positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 can be avoided from becoming excessive.

  That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank contact member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be made non-transferable (can form a non-transfer section). In the structure in which the guide part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin section passes through the non-transmission section and is turned at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin part after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 upward per unit rotation of the drive member 761 is rapid. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the slide pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

  Next, the lifting unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the entire configuration of the elevation unit 800 will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded back perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevation unit 800 is disposed on the base member 810 of the upper combination unit 500 in front of the base member 510 in a front view and a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is movably disposed on the base member 810. And a drive motor 891 for applying a drive force to the lift member 820, a transmission gear 840 for transmitting a drive force for rotation of the drive motor 891 and one end thereof pivotally supported by a base member 810. A link member 850 is disposed rotatably about the pivot portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 connected to the link member 850 and slidably disposed by displacement of the link member 850, and A transmission member 870 is mainly provided to transmit the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevation member 820.

  The base member 810 has slide holes 811, 812, 813 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction at the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B), and pivot pins 814-817 projecting cylindrically on the back side. And are mainly formed.

  Each slide hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole for inserting a slide pin 861, 862, 863 of a slide member 860, which will be described later, into the inside to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860. 43 (b) is formed in the shape of a long hole which opens long in the vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably disposed along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide holes 811 812 813.

  The slide holes 811, 812 and 813 are formed side by side, and the slide hole 811 is formed at the central portion, and the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 are formed on both sides of the slide hole 811. . In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

  The bearing pins 814 to 816 are projections inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 described later to rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed through.

  The pivot support pin 817 is a projection that is inserted into a through hole 851 that is formed through at one end of a link member 850 described later, and rotatably supports the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the lifting and lowering member 820 as described above. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892 a formed in the back cover 892 so as to pass therethrough, and is internally fitted to the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892 a. Therefore, when the drive force of rotation is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

  The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844. As described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable on pivotal support pins 814 to 816 projecting to the back side of the base member 810. Supported by Thus, when the gear 841 is rotated, its driving force is transmitted to the end gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Accordingly, by driving the drive motor 891, the end gear 844 can be rotated.

  The gear 844 is formed with a projection 844 a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The projection 844a is a projection for transmitting the driving force to a link member 850 described later, and is formed so as to project a distance at which the tip end overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 43).

  The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 circularly penetrating at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 penetrated like a long hole substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, a through hole 851 and transmission. And a coupling side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

  The through hole 851 is a through hole for rotatably supporting the link member 850 relative to the base member 810 by inserting the support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside as described above. The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to be detached by inserting the pivot support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back side and fastening with a screw or the like. Be done.

  At an edge portion of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the rear side in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

  Further, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP <b> 1 is formed by winding a wire made of a metal material on a cylindrical spiral in an overlapping manner, and can exert a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge of the helical spring of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state in which the torsion spring SP1 is wound around the spiral is broken, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is the axial direction of the helical portion of the torsion spring SP1 (axial direction of the annular portion 852 Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the cylindrical helical portion is a relatively large torsion spring SP1, the annular portion 852 can suppress the helical state from being broken and stabilize the biasing direction.

  That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can.

  The torsion spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 855 protruding like a hook from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end connected to the locking part 818 protruding like a hook from the back side of the base member 810. It is engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and exert an urging force on the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

  The connection-side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the inner peripheral surface is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844 a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844 a can slide on the inside of the connection-side sliding groove 853 to be displaced. Thus, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

  The transmission-side slide groove 854 is a hole through which the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the short direction Is smaller than the outer diameter of the slide pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

  In addition, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the pivot pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be coupled in a state of interposing the base member 810 therebetween. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 860 disposed on the front side of the base member 810 can be caused by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 disposed on the back side of the base member 810.

  The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in the front view, and the length in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the length in the direction of gravity of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. Thereby, the whole external shape of the raising / lowering unit 800 in a plain view can be made small.

  The slide member 860 has a plurality of slide pins 861 to 863 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 formed in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding on the front side It is mainly provided with two columnar projections 867.

  As described above, the slide pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced according to the displacement of the transmission side slide groove 854. The slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 are projections for regulating the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the slide holes 812 and the slide holes 813 of the base member 810, and the slide pins 862 and slide thereof. A collar C3 is fastened to the end of the moving pin 863 from the back side of the base member 810 by a screw or the like.

  Therefore, the slide pin 860 and the slide pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 which are formed in the base member 810 in the form of straight long holes. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810, and is slidably coupled in the direction of the long holes of the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813. As a result, as the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 in the direction of the elongated hole).

  The slide side slide holes 864 to 866 are holes into which protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction, and the width dimension in the short direction is It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the projections 871a to 871c.

  The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with the rack 872 extending in the direction of gravity and disposed in a pair on the object, and the rack gear of each rack 872 Each pinion gear 873 and the second slide member 871 disposed between the pinion gears 873 are mainly provided.

  The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. In addition, a pair of racks 872 is provided symmetrically about the central portion of the base member 810 in the lateral direction. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side of each rack 872, and is engaged with a pinion gear 873 described later.

  The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872 a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slidingly displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, since the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872 a, the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

  The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape in a front view, a standing portion 871e bent at the lower end and erected on the front side, and a rack gear 871d engraved on the side surface on both sides in the left-right direction; A plurality of projections 871a to 871c protruding in a cylindrical shape are mainly provided on the back side.

  The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevation member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the erected tip end surface, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw into the inside to fasten the elevation member 820 It is formed. Thus, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

  Further, the standing portion 871 e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the lifting and lowering member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging a decorative member 830 described later in the gap. The vertical dimension is set larger than the thickness of. Thereby, the decoration member 830 can be disposed between the lifting and lowering member 820 and the base member 810.

  The rack gear 871 d is a meshing surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the second slide member 871 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

  As described above, the plurality of projections 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side slide holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the rear surface side of the slide member 860 on the tip end side of the projections 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side slide holes 864 to 866 and fastened with a screw or the like. Thus, the second slide member 871 is rotatable relative to the slide member 860, and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of the slide slide holes 864 to 866.

  Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, as described above, the pinion gear 873 is rotated, and accordingly, the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides in the direction of gravity with respect to the slide member 860, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 The displacement distance can be larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be miniaturized, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from being reduced.

  The elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871 as described above, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view. The raising and lowering member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes to the back side.

  The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the erected portion 871 e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position facing the connection hole 871 e 1 of the erected portion. In addition, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed in the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the inside of the connection hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

  A cover member 880 and a decoration member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be suppressed from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

  The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating a title or logo of a game machine, and an LED that emits light is disposed on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player an interest by emitting light from the title, logo or the like to the player side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, the movable mode of the lifting and lowering unit 800 will be described.

  46 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the third state. . 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860 and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) is a transmission member 870, the slide member 860 and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

  The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located on the top and is disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is In the second state, the lift member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

  Further, in FIG. 51, displacement trajectories of the rotary members 435 and 455 placed at the end farthest from the rotation axis of the rotary members 435 and 455 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a symbol of a virtual line KS3 is given. .

  As shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 49 and FIG. 52 (a), when the lift unit 800 is positioned in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed) Is positioned higher in the direction of gravity than the one end side (the side on which the through hole 851 is formed). In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in the upper position. Accordingly, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in the upper position.

  In the first state, an imaginary line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the projection 844a, and the axis of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 And a virtual line KS2 connecting the middle position in the width direction of the connection-side sliding groove 853 is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 (see FIG. 49).

  That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the raising and lowering member 820 can be held by the connection side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the projection 844 a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the link member 850 by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, since the first state can be maintained without applying power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, energy consumption can be reduced.

  When power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the states shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52 (a) and the drive force of rotation acts, as described above, the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate and The driving force is transmitted. The projection 844 a of the end gear 844 is displaced in position as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844 a is inserted into and coupled to the inside of the connection-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 in accordance with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

  When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 in which the slide pin 861 is inserted and coupled to the transmission side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 is slide-displaced. Thereby, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Thus, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872 a formed on the rack 872 according to the displacement thereof. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid and displaced. As a result, the lift member 820 can be displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the lifting and lowering unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by the drive motor 891 being rotated. State. Therefore, the raising and lowering member 820 can be displaced below the first state with respect to the base member 810.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). In the lifting and lowering unit 800 in the third state, the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, as with the displacement from the first state to the second state, the raising and lowering member 820 can be displaced below the second state with respect to the base member 810.

  In this case, the raising and lowering member 820 is disposed at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decoration member 830. Thus, the player can visually recognize the title or logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. In addition, the raising and lowering member 820 can be adjacent to the lower side of the decoration member 830, so that the raising and lowering member 820 and the decoration member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the lift unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) in which the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800 and the decoration member 830 are combined is displayed in front of the game area. it can.

  Furthermore, in the third state, the slide pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are positioned at the lower ends of the slide holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevation member 820 can be held by the three slide pins 861 to 863, the load of the elevation member 820 can be prevented from acting on the projection 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, breakage of the gear 844 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of operation unit 200 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the lifting base 720 of the projecting unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion. A state 820 is displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. Thus, one pattern (the movable base (the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting and lowering unit 800) (lifting base 720, rotating members 435 and 455, and lifting and lowering member 820) are brought close to each other It can be made to be recognized by the player as the title, logo or character of the gaming machine 10).

  Moreover, each movable unit is formed in the shape which each member imitated the pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wing of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are formed in a bow shape. The lift member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the lift unit 800 can combine the lift member 820 and the decoration member 830 to form one pattern (character), the lift base 720, the rotation member 435, and the like in the combined state (projected state). The 455, the lifting member 820 and the decoration member 830 may be combined to form a single character.

  That is, the lifting and lowering unit 800 not only combines the lifting and lowering base 820 and the decoration member 830 to form one display surface, but also other movable units (protrusion unit 700 and slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200. Can be combined into one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display modes can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (lifting unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200 different, and the player can be entertained. Can be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the combined state, the operation unit 200 includes the elevation member 820 of the elevation unit 800 and a part of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the front and rear direction It is placed at the overlapping position. That is, the lifting and lowering members 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. The raising and lowering members 820 are disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of the respective rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

  In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting and lowering unit 800 which are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the combined (overhanging) position. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the projection unit 700 of the three movable units, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the rendering effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

  In this case, the raising and lowering members 820 of the raising and lowering unit 800 are arranged at different positions from the rotating members 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the protruding position. It does not abut the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position or there is a possibility of coming into contact, it is necessary to set in consideration of damage due to an impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form an aspect such as displacing the later moving up and down member 820 so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 at the overhanging position, etc. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the projecting members 735 of the projecting unit 700 are disposed on the rear side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the sliding members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, when the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotary members 435 and 455 is a protrusion member 735. Contact can be suppressed. As a result, breakage of the projecting member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  Here, when a plurality of movable units (lifting and lowering unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) move and unite in the space of the central portion of the gaming machine (the front of the third symbol display device 81) There is a gaming machine which makes them collide and unite. However, when the side surfaces collide and unite, the collision tends to form a flaw on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

  Also, it is conceivable to slow the speed of the collision in order to suppress the formation of flaws on the collision surface, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, It has fallen. There is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the plurality of movable units (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the movable units When displacing to the central space of the gaming machine and combining them, the sides of each other do not collide. Therefore, it can suppress that a damage | wound is formed in a movable unit, and can suppress that the designability of a movable unit is impaired.

  Furthermore, when the movable units are displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and united, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the displacement speed can be made constant when the unit is displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in speed of the combination operation of the prizes and to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the lifting and lowering unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the lifting and lowering unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871). The slide unit 400 has a configuration in which the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). The speed of the displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the formula (form consisting of only the rack and the pinion), and thus the movement speed can be improved to increase the movement speed (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400 and protrusion unit 700). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time during which the player can visually recognize the action of combining. It is possible to prevent the player's interest is impaired.

  Here, if the movable units (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400, and projection unit 700) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction become bulky and large. If the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 are respectively reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the dimension in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to secure the configuration.

  On the other hand, since the raising and lowering member 820 includes the second slide member 871 which is formed on the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the longitudinal direction, the whole (the raising and lowering member 820, rotation The longitudinal dimension of the lifting and lowering member 820 is increased while the size in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine 10 is reduced by suppressing the longitudinal dimension as the sum of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rigidity thereof is reduced. It can be secured.

  The elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is disposed at a position projecting to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the respective rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are in the front-rear direction. It is disposed at the overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back side of the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 can be made large, and the width that increases in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, elevating unit 800 and slide unit 400 are arranged by disposing rotation members 435 and 455 of slide unit 400 at the same position as second slide member 871 having a smaller width in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 53). Can be reduced in width in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 can be configured so as not to intersect the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455. Collision during displacement can be suppressed (see the phantom line KS3 in FIG. 51).

  Next, displacement modes when the movable units (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) are displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 55 to 58 sequentially show the displacement mode when the movable units are displaced to the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In this embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid and displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projection unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of rotational displacement, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidingly displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slidingly displaced upward, and the tip of the rocking member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the first operation is performed by the protrusion unit 700 slidingly displacing the lift base 720 relative to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. The detailed description of the displacement of the lifting base 720 is as described above, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevation unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

  The second operation is performed during the displacement of the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is displaced relative to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotary members 435 and 455 and the lift member 720.

  As described above, as the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and displaced, the rotation members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. Therefore, the rotation angle of each rotation member 435 and 455 is set to the central position of the game board 13 (Rotational center position in FIG. 57) is rotationally displaced to a symmetrical angle.

  Here, the first member and the second member formed to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (projected) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined position. There is a gaming machine that effects bringing a first member and a second member into association (integrally) and causing a player to visually recognize them as one character by bringing the first member and the second member into close proximity or in contact with each other.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the 1st member and the 2nd member in a large size.

  However, if the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined (projected) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are mutually displaced on the way to the combined position. May interfere with Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can not be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. , The staging effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is linearly displaced so as to move up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that it is disposed at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400, Since the 455 is disposed at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed is shortened, and the rendering effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus not intersecting with the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 displaced linearly, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotation members 435 and 455 is a displacement of the elevation base 720 It is set to a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the elevation base 720, the rotational locus of the rotary members 435 and 455 is a rotational locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevation base 720, and the rotational locus is combined The displacement component of the elevating base 720 in the displacement direction is set to be reduced as it is displaced to the position.

  Thus, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevation base 720. Therefore, by rotating and displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is made a displacement locus avoiding the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 for linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevation base 720 are shifted, the trajectories do not intersect with each other, so interference between the members can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the lifting and lowering base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, so the time until the pattern (character) is formed is shortened. The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevation base 720, so that the outer shape in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevation base 720 of the slide unit 700 linearly displaced. Can be easily suppressed from interfering with the rotating members 435 and 455. Thus, the lifting base 720 can be increased in size.

  As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed on the slidable base members 434 and 454. That is, the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a combined manner of rotational displacement and linear displacement, and are displaced to the combined (projected) position. Accordingly, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, interference with the rotating member 730 can be easily suppressed while the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced to the combined position.

  That is, since the rotation members 435 and 455 can move in the relationship with the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (projected) position by the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation to the combination position is performed. It can be used not as movement but as displacement for avoiding interference with the protrusion unit 700, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

  Here, in the case of only rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, since the position of the rotating shaft is fixed, the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set to the end of the rotating members 435 and 455 In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end opposite to the rotation axis is only rotationally displaced, so it is difficult to set the displacement distance of the elevating base 720 large. When setting the rotation axis of the rotation members 435 and 455 at the center of the rotation members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotation member collides with the rear case 300 when displacing from the retracted position to the extended position. It is difficult to dispose the rotating member at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation axes of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the central position of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation axes of the rotation members are slatable on the base members 434 and 454. Because they are coupled, the rotary members 435 and 455 can be operated in combination of linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, when rotating the rotation members 435 and 455, by applying linear displacement, the rotation members 435 and 455 disposed at the retracted position are prevented from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotation displacement occurs. The displacement distance can be set large.

  Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a mode in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is the attitude at the combined position. It can be defined independently. That is, in the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced only by rotation and displaced between the retracted position and the combined position, the posture at the retracted position of the rotating members 435 and 455 is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the rotational members 435 and 455 can be linearly displaced, so that the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the rotary members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

  In other words, in the retracted position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are disposed outward), the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retraction space at the retracted position. On the other hand, in the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), the direction is made substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81 by rotating. As a result, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the rotary members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be enhanced, and at the united position, the central portion of the game board 13 can be stretched.

  Furthermore, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is disposed at the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged in size. , The space on both sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (projected) position and the protruding unit 700 is formed together with the character, a large character can not be formed. I can not fully demonstrate the stage effects. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, since the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotation members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed in the horizontally long attitude at the combined (projected) position, and are disposed in the vertically long attitude at the retracted position. The space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized, and the rotation members 435 and 455 can be enlarged accordingly, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

  That is, the evacuation space where the rotation members 435 and 455 are evacuated is made small to secure a space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the gaming machine 10, and to the central portion of the gaming machine 10 at the united position. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

  Further, as described above, the rotary members 435 and 455 are rotatably and movably coupled to the base members 434 and 454, and synchronize the rotational displacements of the rotary members 435 and 455 with the linear displacements of the base members 434 and 454. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the projecting unit 700 can be enhanced. As a result, interference with the protruding unit 700 can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 to the extended position.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotation members 435 and 455, the rotation members 435 and 455 can be formed larger accordingly, and together with the projecting unit 700 in the combined (overhanging) position. The characters to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in an area where it is difficult to secure a relatively narrow arrangement space for a member, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotation member 435 , 455, and the rotary members 435 and 455 can be formed large.

  In addition, the projecting unit 700 includes the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730. In the second operation, since the swinging member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, it can be brought close to and abut on the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by the contact with the rocking member 732. In this case, since the pivoting member 732 is in a state in which the tip thereof is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the pivoting member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the pivoting member 732 with the rotary members 435 and 455 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 with the displacement.

  Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip end of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the state in which the movable units are united (in a united state), and to give the player an interest by displacement of the bonus.

  Furthermore, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, the space between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 and the swinging member 732 The space (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

  Thereby, when the rotation members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) are in the combined state, a displaceable space can be secured. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, it is possible to make the displacement to further rotate the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450), and increase variations in displacement modes in the combined state of the operation unit 200. .

  That is, when the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the rocking member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and plays a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can displace the swinging member 732 in the direction approaching the rotating member 730, and can use the space formed along with the displacement as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be enhanced.

  Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combination of each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is shown. For example, when the respective members (rotational members 435 and 455, the elevation base 720 (rotational member 730), the elevation member 820) of the operation units are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435 and 455 have a shape resembling a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated using the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow It can be in a state of being pulled by an arrow or a state in which an arrow is released from a bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are parts of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (the side opposite to the arrowhead) of the arrow. Is the middle portion of the bow, and the decoration member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is a part of the tip end side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is shifted in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. FIG. 59A and 59B illustrate transition states when the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other when the stop position of the left slide member 430 is shifted in the excess direction.

  In FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), only the left rotation member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swinging member 732 the left rotation member It is considered that it is the same as the case where 435 is disposed symmetrically about the center position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are defective due to poor control, rattling of the members, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor. There is a possibility that the side surface of each rotating member 435, 455 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 without stopping at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, there is a possibility that the swinging member 732 collides with the respective rotating members 435 and 455 to damage the part.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is disposed is rotatably disposed with respect to the elevating base 720, as shown in FIG. Thus, by rotating the rotation member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720, the impact when the rotation member 435 collides with the rocking member 732 can be mitigated. Therefore, damage to the swinging member 732 and the respective rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 can be rotated relative to the lift base 720 to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the protrusion unit 700, and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other. Damage can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevation base 720, The swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 disposed in a pair rotate and abut on the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

  Therefore, after the rotation member 730 is rotated to reduce the impact of the collision between the rotation member 435 and the rocking member 732, the driving force for the rotation member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotation member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it can be restricted that the rotation member 730 is further rotated.

  That is, two pairs of the swinging member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) abuts on the swinging member 732 in one set, Since the rocking member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set along with the contact, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) When being displaced and abutted against the rocking member 732 beyond the reference position, the rocking member 732 is directed to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set along with the abutment. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), and thereby the contact of the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) with the swinging member 732 in one set is caused. The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, kinetic energy can be dispersed, displacement of the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  Further, in this case, the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 07B) with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435). Since the driving force can be applied in the direction opposite to the rotational moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotation member 435) when abutting on the member 435), the rotation member 455 (rotation member 435) The rotation moment of the rotation member 730 can be restricted using the rotation moment of. Therefore, since it is not necessary to supply electric power in order to regulate rotation of rotation member 730, drive energy can be controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excess direction will be described. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) illustrate transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732.

  Here, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 is shifted in the excess direction, the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455, and the swinging member 732 or each rotating member 435, 455 Could be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-described third operation at the end timing of the second operation (end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the rocking member 732, the rocking member 732 can be displaced downward to reduce the impact of the collision. As a result, breakage of the swinging member 732 or the respective rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  Further, in this case, since the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be the driving force for causing the projecting member 735 to project, the driving motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735 The load can be reduced. That is, the driving member 761 (see FIG. 40) is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the driving member 761 by transmitting the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with the respective rotation members 435 and 455 via the sliding wall 733c. Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

  The third operation may be delayed for a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction and the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive for displacing the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacing the pivoting member 732.

  Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy at the time of driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, displacements of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 in the third operation. In FIG. 61 (b), a state in which each of the rotary members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the gap between each of the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation corresponds to that of the rotary member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swinging member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) in accordance with the displacement of the projecting member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than the second operation.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), by sliding the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 further to the central part of the gaming machine 10, the rotary members 435 and 455 can be rotated. The central portion of the gaming machine 10 can be displaced. As a result, a sense of unity can be further given to the combined (projected) state of the elevation member 820 and the respective rotation members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 to FIG. 68, the second combined state of the operation unit 200 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 is projected to the position of the second combined state. Also, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 at the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 at the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are illustrated respectively.

  Furthermore, the respective members (rotation members 435 and 455, the elevation base 720 (rotation member 730) of the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projection unit 700, and the elevation unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. And the elevation member 820) in the combined (overhanging) position will be described below as a first combined state. Further, in the first combined state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is set as a first effect mode. It can be made to be recognized by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper combination unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22A). The lower unit unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 62, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidingly displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 from the state shown in FIG. By being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combining unit 600 being displaced upward, the state shown in FIG. 63 is formed. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (the position shown in FIG. 18 (a)), and the upper combining unit 500 is in the overhanging position (the position shown in FIG. 22 (a)). By being displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27C, the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

  In the second united state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit unit 500 and lower unit unit 600) are associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as a second effect mode. It can be made to be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode is, for example, a pattern (character) imitating Pegasus (a imaginative creature with feathers on the horse's trunk) and the like. In this case, a part forming the body of Pegasus is a lower uniting unit 600, a part forming a head of Pegasus is an upper uniting unit 500, and a part forming a wing of Pegasus is a slide unit 400.

  In the second united state, the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 has the base member 434, which is slidably displaceable, displaced to the extended position of the slide end position (the position shown in FIG. 18A). That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged such that the sliding displacement distance from the retracted position is different. Further, since the rotation member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the positions where the rotation member 435 is disposed can be different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotation member 435 is linked (synchronized) to the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. As the sliding displacement distance is different, the rotation angles (posture) of the rotation member 435 are arranged differently. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (orientation) of the rotation member 435 is disposed in a posture different by approximately 180 degrees around the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

  As described above, the operation unit 200 stretches each member (rotational members 435 and 455, elevation base 720 (rotational member 730) and elevation member 820) of each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700 and elevation unit 800). By displacement to the exit position, the members can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, as the first effect mode, operation unit 200 only combines the respective members in the space at the center of operation unit 200 (the space in front of third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, it is possible to combine each member in the space at the center of the operation unit 200 as a second effect mode and form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

  Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player visually recognizes each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode by effect, time, etc. It can be done. Therefore, since the variation of the presentation can be increased, it is possible to show the various presentation to the player and give the player an interest.

  Here, the first movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the combined (projected) position, and the movable position formed between the retracted position and the projected position There is known a gaming machine provided with a second movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units.

  According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) to form one pattern ( When the respective movable units of the second movable unit group are arranged in the overhanging position, the respective movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other, while making the player recognize the character as the first effect mode. An effect of causing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as the second effect mode is performed. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed to the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of, and in the second gaming state, the first movable units are retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is By arranging each movable unit of the group to the overhanging position, an effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the movable units of the first movable unit group and the movable units of the second movable unit group large in size, respectively.

  However, when a plurality of characters (representation modes) are formed as in the above-described conventional technique, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit because the area (space) to be kept is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (representation mode).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) are combined. Since the movable unit of the movable unit of the unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600) is also used, the movable unit required to form a plurality of (first and second) rendering modes The total number can be reduced, and the size of each movable unit can be increased. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 causes the player to visually recognize the part of the pattern (character) which the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the second effect mode. As a part of the display unit, the movable units for forming the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, a space is formed in the retraction space of the inner edge of the back case 300 (a space other than the space in the center of the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)). The unit 400, the upper combining unit 500, the lower combining unit 600, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 can be enlarged.

  In addition, since the members (rotating members 435 and 455, upper displacing member 530, lower displacing member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of the movable units can be increased in size, the first The pattern (character) formed by the presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be enlarged.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 causes the player to visually recognize the second effect mode and a part of the pattern (character) causing the player to visually recognize the first effect mode. When it is arranged in the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode when it is shared as part of the), the movable common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (the rotating member 435) is used, which hinders interest.

  In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect respectively using the members (rotational members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form the difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is disposed at the time of forming the second effect mode and the united (overhanging) position at which the first effect mode is formed. Since the position is different from that of the exit position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first and second effect modes, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode In addition, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the player's interest is hindered.

  Moreover, since the rotation member 435 can be disposed at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the degree of freedom can be enhanced, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode This makes it easy to form the difference (shape or arrangement position) with the above.

  Here, when the rotating members 435 are disposed in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating members 435 are used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for the player to see things, which hinders interest. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively using the rotating member 435 in the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount and the first effect mode and It becomes difficult to form a difference (a shape or an arrangement position) with the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has a posture at the time of forming the first effect mode and a posture at the time of forming the second effect mode different from each other. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest. In addition, it is possible to easily form the difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  Therefore, as described above, since the rotating member 435 is disposed in different positions in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and in different attitudes (rotational angles) to be arranged, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are shared, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest.

  That is, the rotary member 435, which is shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode, is in a state in which either one of the position or the attitude at which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are arranged is different. In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, there is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is used, but the rotating member 435 is not limited to the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different in the mode and the second effect mode, the player is notified that the rotating member 435 is used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

  In addition, the rotation member 435 is rotatably disposed on the linearly displaced base member 434 so that the rotation displacement and the linear displacement are combined in a combined manner. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rotation member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotation member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be enhanced. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) with each other to cause the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotation member 435, the rotation member 345 can be formed larger accordingly, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be For example, even if there is an area where it is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of 435.

  In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in areas where the rotary members 435 of the base member 434 overlap in a front view in the retracted position, and accordingly, the other regions of the base member 434 (conversion mechanism Can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction of the region where Therefore, when the lower displacing member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, the lower displacing member 640 can be prevented from contacting the side surface of the base member 434.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, displacement modes of the operation unit 200 forming the second combined state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500, and the lower combining unit 600. FIG. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIa direction view of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a view of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400 in the arrow LXVIIb direction view, the upper unit unit 500, and the lower unit unit 600. FIG. FIG. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a view of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400 in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view, the upper unit unit 500, and the lower unit unit 600. FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (a) to FIG. 66 (b), displacement modes from the retracted state to the second combined state are illustrated in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, FIG. Each of the slide units 400 in the retracted state is illustrated.

  Further, the displacement from the state of FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

  66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600 at an intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second combined state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. In the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66 (a), while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state, the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600 are displaced. Is done. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper combination unit 500, and the lower combination unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. The transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

  Furthermore, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper combination unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower combination unit 600, and the rotation member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by dashed lines in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (in the retracted position), in the upper combination unit 500, the upper displacement member 530 is housed in the base member 510. The lower combining unit 600 is disposed at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotation member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

  As described above, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of the front side base member 434b disposed on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) disposed on the back side. A stepped portion 434b2 is formed on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

  The stepped portion 434 b 2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit unit 600, and the entire lower side of the stepped portion 434 b 2 of the base member 434 is the back surface. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotation member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

  That is, since the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is recessed toward the back side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower united unit 600 is placed in the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

  Further, since the thickness in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base member 434 is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidingly displaced in the first state (state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 can be prevented from contacting each other.

  On the other hand, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotation member 435 can be disposed on the upper side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 by thickening the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is assumed.

  The base member 434 is connected to the upper end side (the upper side in FIG. 65) so as to be slidably displaceable relative to the base member 410 as described above and is suspended, and the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 65A). Since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  Further, at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65A), the rear surface side of the connection arm 650 of the lower combination unit 600 is in contact with the plane between the step 434b2 and the pivot hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the lower combination unit 600 in the retracted state falls in the front-rear direction.

  That is, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, in the lower unit 600, the connection arm 650 connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are located where the upper end tends to fall back and forth. In this state, the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower combination unit 600 at the retracted position can be stabilized in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the base member 434 slides in the first state, contact with the lower displacement member 640 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotary member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount, so that the rotary member 435 can be rotated, and the rotary member 435 and the lower combining unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction. The united unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  That is, it does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotation member 435 and the lower base member 610 of the lower combining unit 600 in front view. A lower displacement member 640 of the part is arranged.

  As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is easily inclined in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, collision of the lower displacement member 640 with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 can be suppressed.

  In the first state, the upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (rotational driving force) the base member 434 to displace the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit unit 500 It is arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with 530 and the front-back direction. Thereby, when displacing to the second state, collision of the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 with the rotation shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 can be suppressed.

  That is, in the case where the slide unit 400 and the upper combining unit 500 are displaced at the same start time (timing) from the retracted position, the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement rather than the start time for the left slide member 430 to start displacement, collision of the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 with the rotation shaft 435a can be suppressed.

  In addition, the downward displacement of the upper displacing member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacing member 630. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced, collision with the side surface of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only at one end, the other end (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacing member 530 is rotated downward and projected and displaced as it is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slidingly displaced to the center side with respect to the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side than the front surface of the base member 434. Since the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, the base displacement member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. Collision with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 68 (a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 66 (a)). Therefore, the rotating member 435 which is rotationally displaced according to the slide displacement of the base member 434 is also rotationally displaced. Thus, one end of the rotating member 435 positioned on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding the base member 434 to increase the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 66A) and rotating the rotary member 435, the up-down direction of the region K2 (FIG. a) The width in the vertical direction can be increased.

  Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to suppress collision with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 when the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is tilted in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, at the time of displacement from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be disposed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so as described above, the other end portion of the upper displacement member 530 ( It can suppress that the upper contact portion 533 side is displaced in the front-rear direction and collides with the side surface of the base member 434.

  In other words, since the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 434 in a front view while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position forming a second combined state It can be suppressed that the upper displacing member 530 abuts on the side surface of the base member 434 until it is released.

  Furthermore, since the projecting position of the upper displacing member 530 is disposed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned on the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize The displacement member 530 and the rotation member 435 can be associated (integrated) to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit unit 500 and the lower abutment portion 643 of the lower unit unit 600 are in contact with each other. In addition, a part of the rotation member 435 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower combination unit 600.

  As a result, the rotary member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed close to each other, and can be viewed by the player as one pattern (character).

  Here, since the rotation member 435 has different overhanging positions and different postures (rotational angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and needs to form a plurality of stop states, control or The structure becomes complicated, and the state of stop (arrangement position and attitude) is likely to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotation member 435 of the slide unit 400 abuts on the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combination unit 600 when forming the second rendering mode, If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600, while if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper combination The unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 are pushed out to cause misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit unit 500 and the lower unit unit 600 in the united state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper unit unit 500, lower unit unit 600, protrusion unit 700). The movable units (upper displacing member 530, lower displacing member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the elevating unit 800) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction and each movable unit in front view Since it overlaps with a part of the movable members of the above, even when the stopped state (the overhanging position or the posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relation with each movable member of each movable unit It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in a front view, even when the displacement of the rotary member 435 is insufficient, formation of a gap between each movable unit and each movable member can be suppressed, and the position in the front-rear direction is By being different from each other, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is excessive, it is possible to suppress that the movable members of the movable units are pushed out to cause positional deviation. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association between each movable unit and each movable member in the combined state.

  In the second effect mode, the upper abutting portion 533 of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower abutting portion 643 of the lower displacing member 640 are abutted and disposed, and the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of it. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 can be associated (integrated) to make it easier for the player to recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

  That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be at the same position in the front-rear direction, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (projected) state can be Since it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize in an integrated manner, it is possible to easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode to the player.

  In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is at the stopping position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure in contact with the 530 and the lower displacing member 640, a gap is formed between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 does not reach the target position. ) Is inhibited.

  Similarly, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause positional deviation even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotation member 435 exceeds the target position, the association (unification) is inhibited. That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are in contact with each other, the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640. The upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out when the arrangement position or posture of 435 exceeds the target position. In this case, since the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are misaligned with each other in contact with each other, not only the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are misaligned with respect to the rotating member 435 Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (projected) position, the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640. Especially effective.

  Further, in this case, a part of the rotation member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a part of a portion where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 abut. The contact portion between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member can be made less visible to the player by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player can not recognize the pattern (character) of the second effect mode and the interest is lost.

  Next, a slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. However, the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment The 2450 is switched between rotating and non-rotating the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 according to the slide displacement. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably disposed relative to the body base member 2480. Configured

  The main body base member 2480 is formed of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and a protruding plate portion 411 is provided upright on the front side of the game board at the lower side edge. Further, on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction, a projecting portion 2481 is formed to project from the main body base member 2480.

  On the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first side pinion gear 432 disposed on the first member 431 in accordance with the slide displacement of the first member 431 is engraved.

  The protrusions 2481 are formed on both longitudinal ends of the main body base member 2480 as described above. The protruding portion 2481 is provided with a circular bearing hole 2481 a into which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481 b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in a projecting portion 2481 formed on one longitudinal end side (right side of the gaming machine) of the main body base member 2480.

  The bearing holes 2481a are recessed outward on the both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the longitudinal center of the main body base member 2480, and the respective axial centers formed at both ends are formed concentrically.

  The rotation transmitting member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a size slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, a rotating portion 2487 which is formed in a substantially circular shape in side view and has a predetermined thickness is formed, and a shaft portion 2486 of the shaft-like body is longitudinally outward from the shaft center of the rotating portion 2487. Are formed projecting.

  Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmitting member 2485, a left rotation transmitting rack gear 413 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) and a right rotation transmitting rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). It will be set up.

  Shafts 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transfer member 2485 are concentric with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481 a formed in the protruding portion 2481, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481 a.

  Accordingly, when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481 a of the projecting portion 2481 and arranged in the main body base member 2480, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the shaft of the shaft portion 2486.

  A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is disposed on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with a pinion gear 2488 disposed on one longitudinal side (right side in front view) of the main body base member 2480.

  The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotational drive motor 2489 to the rotation transfer member 2485, and the shaft center thereof is fastened to the rotational drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotational shaft inserted into the through hole 2481 b of the protrusion 2481 and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protrusion 2481.

  Therefore, by applying rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmission member 2485. Thus, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437 a disposed on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2437a rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430, a rotational drive can be applied to the rotation member 435.

  The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457 a disposed on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2457a rotates, the drive is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. Thus, with the slide displacement of the right slide member 2450, the rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455.

  Next, transmission gear 2437a and transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. The transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, and thus the detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

  71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 whose tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the rear side.

  The teeth 2437a1 mesh with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and have a thickness substantially the same as the thickness dimensions (dimensions in the front and rear direction) of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

  The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion bulging in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the center of the tooth thickness as it goes to the back side. The distance dimension by which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges out from the tooth portion 2437a1 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. Thereby, it can suppress that the rigidity of bulging part 2437a2 falls, and can suppress that bulging part 2437a2 is damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the operation of the rotation transfer member 2485 will be described. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state in which the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) is a rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is the schematic diagram which carried out the plain view of the slide unit 2400 in the state from which the meshing of this was cancelled | released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

  In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is performed. A state in which the gear 2437a meshes with the gear 2437a is formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, whereby the rotating member 435 is rotated.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the rotational transmission member 2485 is rotated upward by applying the rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Ru.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmitting member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmitting rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmitting member 2485 becomes the rotation transmitting member 2485. Is displaced upward with the rotation of. Thereby, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotation member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be configured not to rotate.

  That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 435 is rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430; The displacement is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 2430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 435 remains non-rotational It is possible to form a third drive state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force.

  As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotational member 435 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, it is also conceivable to dispose a drive motor for applying a driving force for causing the left slide member 2430 to rotate the rotation member 435. However, when the drive motor is disposed on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 is increased, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 is increased. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to arrange the drive means for rotationally driving the rotation member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  In addition, the rotation transmission member 2485 including the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, whereby the left rotation transmission is performed. The gear can not be engaged when switching from the second drive state in which the engagement is released to the first drive state in which engagement is performed if the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other. There is a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a can not mesh with each other due to a collision.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed in the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portion and the tooth portion of the transmission gear 2437a when switching from the second driving state in which the tooth engagement is released to the first driving state in which the tooth is engaged. it can.

  Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the rear surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface which becomes gradually smaller. can do.

  That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 in the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing has been released to the meshed first driving state.

  Preferably, the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is formed on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, displacement of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a is suppressed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly switch the rotation transmission member 2485 from the first drive state to the second drive state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment In accordance with the slide displacement, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are switched between rotating and non-rotating states. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 disposed in front of the main body base member 3480.

  The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is provided upright at an edge portion.

  On the lower side of the projecting plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the lower surface side at the other end side (game board left side) in the longitudinal direction, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (game board right side). It will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is vertically formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side.

  The housing member 3490 is a member on which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are disposed, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. At the same time, a projecting wall 3491 projecting from the edge to the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433 and the rack member 451 are disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the projecting wall 3491.

  In addition, the housing member 3490 is formed such that the external shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Thus, the housing member 3490 can be disposed inside the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

  The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the lower projecting wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, in the upper projecting wall 3491 of the housing member 3490, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed.

  The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the housing member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the housing member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 The diameter is smaller than the diameter of.

  The cylinder 3495 is a member that causes the storage member 3490 to slide up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft that protrudes from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft It is a member (solenoid) which displaces the protrusion distance of.

  The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 in a state where the shaft portion is inserted into the inside of the insertion hole 3481 c formed in the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the projecting plate portion 3411 a of the main body base member 3480.

  Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the accommodation member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. That is, the housing member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

  Next, the operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other. FIG. 75 (b) is a housing member 3490. Of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other, and the slide unit 3400 is viewed from the front. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), when the housing member 3490 is at the upper position, the distance L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is While being arranged in a sufficiently secured state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a mesh with each other.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides on the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to project from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

  That is, in a state where the housing member 3490 is positioned downward, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is smaller than the distance dimension L1. A state in which the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a is released is formed (distance dimension L1> L2).

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides on the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a does not rotate since the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430; Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 435 is not rotated is stopped, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of the motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a disposed on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. The first driving state and the second driving state can be switched.

  Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

  That is, when the phase of the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought close to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 with a phase shift, the left rotation transmission rack gear Since the transmission gear 437a meshes while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a abuts on the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phase, and the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment In accordance with the slide displacement, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are switched between rotating and non-rotating states. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long plate-like member in a front view rectangular shape, and a protruding plate portion 411 is provided upright on the front side of the game board at the lower edge . On the bottom surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 for applying rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 for applying rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. In addition, notches 4413a are formed at the both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are provided with small teeth 4413b whose external shape is smaller than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

  On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, on both end portions of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, notch portions 4414a in which the tooth surfaces are cut out are formed. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a are provided with small teeth 4414b whose external shape is smaller than those of non-adjacent teeth.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. FIG. 33 is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a front view, in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIG. 78A, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates left. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is A state is released in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is disengaged from the gear.

  That is, the rotary member 435 can be rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a where the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a where the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to rotate the rotation member 435 by its inertia force. Can be continued.

  Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430; Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 435 is not rotated is stopped, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of the motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Further, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is achieved by canceling the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a by dropping some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Since it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like on the left slide member 430 for releasing the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a, the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the small-sized teeth 4413b are formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are broken when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. Can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

  That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that has passed through the notch 4413a collide with each other.

  In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a mesh smoothly when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

  That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the phase of rotation with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 mesh with each other and can not mesh.

  In this case, when the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase of rotation by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a to be smaller than the other teeth. However, when the small teeth 4413 b and the transmission gear 437 a abut on each other, the transmission gear 437 a can be rotated to adjust its phase by suppressing meshing of the teeth with each other. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded back perspective view of the left slide member 5430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment 5450 is switched between the state of rotating the rotation member 5435 and the rotation member 5455 and the state of non-rotation according to the slide displacement. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

  The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b coupled to a shaft hole 5437f1 circularly formed through the shaft center of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c coupled to the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and cam surfaces of the inner ring 5439c. Mainly composed of a plurality of rollers 5439d disposed in the housing, a holder 5439e for holding the respective rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the holder 5439e to switch the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface .

  A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in a long hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protrusion 5436d which is protruded to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the model which looked at slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawing is simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, when the displacement member 5436 is disposed on the back side of the rotation member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b Bite into the wedge formed between. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced relative to the rotation member 5435, the position of the projecting portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 becomes the rotation member 5435 in accordance with the displacement. Displace against Thereby, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and separates from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is shut off.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 is rotated with the displacement of the left slide member 5430 Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 5430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 remains non-rotation, and the one-way clutch when stopping the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 When the left slide member 5430 is stopped, the third drive state in which the rotation of the rotary member 5435 is continued by the inertia force is formed by changing the state in which the transmission of the rotation is allowed from the state of 5439 to the state where the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition to the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435, the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined, so that the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can share the role of rendering by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment 6450 is switched between the state of rotating the rotation member 5435 and the rotation member 5455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 and the non-rotation state by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435 in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the back side base member 434a. Ru.

  The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one way clutch 5439.

  In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to an operation member 6438 described later Ru.

  The operating element 6438 is formed in a rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view. The operation pin 6438 has a connection pin 6438a projecting forward at an end portion on the lower side, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the center portion in the vertical direction.

  The through hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into an insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the back side base member 434a in a cylindrical shape, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

  Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted through the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 is through hole 6438b Are arranged on the back surface of the back side base member 434a in a rotatable state about the axis.

  The connection pin 6438a is a cylindrical body inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter is smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove 5439a1.

  Therefore, when the operating element 6438 rotates around the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes. The switching plate 5439 a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

  Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed between the through hole 6438 b and the insertion pin 6434 a 2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434 a, and the other end is locked to the operating element 6438. As a result, the operating element 6438 is always urged in the right rotation direction about the through hole 6438 b in the front view. As a result, in a state in which no external force is applied to the operation element 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in a driving state (a state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described.

  FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is a slide unit in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated It is the model which looked at 6400 from the front. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, in order to facilitate understanding, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operating element 6438 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is provided with a projection 6411a at the slide end of the left slide member 6430 that protrudes from the bottom surface of the projecting plate 411 of the base member 6410. .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), when no external force is applied to the operating element 6438, the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 matches the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Will be placed.

  In this case, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 is slide-displaced, and the other end of the operating element 6438 disposed on the left slide member 6430 just before the end of slide displacement. The side surface of the side (upper side) in the right side in front view abuts on the projection 6411 a of the base member 6410.

  After the side surface of the operating element 6438 and the base member 6410 abut, when the left slide member 6430 is further moved to the terminal end, the operating element 6438 is displaced in the left rotational direction centering on the through hole 6438b.

  Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and separates from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operation element 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state permitting transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 and a state cutting off the transmission of the rotation. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 is rotated with the displacement of the left slide member 6430 When stopping the rotation, the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from a state allowing the transmission of rotation to a state blocking it, so that the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertia force in a state in which the left slide member 6430 is stopped. The third drive state can be formed.

  Thus, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by a minute. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

  A seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, a slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment 7450 is switched to a state of rotating the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439 and to a non-rotation state. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86, on the back surface of the base member 7410, a recessed groove 7417 is formed in which a second slide member 7460 described later is disposed.

  The second slide member 7460 is held and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged opposite to the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462 A shaft portion 7463, a roller 7465 disposed in a state where the shaft portion 7463 is inserted, and a drive gear 7464 disposed above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. Ru.

  The rack gear 7461 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a gear tooth surface 7461 a is formed on the upper surface side. Moreover, the stop hole 7461b penetrated in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center position of the longitudinal direction in front view.

  The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465 to be described later, and is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is longitudinally recessed in the vertical direction on the side surface, and a through hole 7462b is formed through the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction above the sliding groove 7462a.

  The through hole 7462 b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462 b and fastening the screw with the fixing hole 7461 b of the rack gear 7461.

  The shaft portion 7463 is a cylindrical member inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 7462 a of the plate member 7462, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462 a. Further, the axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

  As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. .

  The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and an axial hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axial center thereof. The roller 7465 has the shaft portion 7463 inserted into the shaft hole and is disposed between the two plate members 7462.

  The drive gear 7464 is a member for meshing with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a drive force to slide the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

  The motor 7466 is a member for applying a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 in a state where the shaft of the motor 7466 is inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

  Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 is rotated, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

  In the plate member 7462 disposed forward of the two plate members 7462, a decoration (display of a symbol or the like) is provided on a plane disposed on the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can slide and displace from a position overlapping the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position not overlapping with the left slide member 7430, thereby making it possible for the player to visually recognize the decorative surface.

  Next, state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 viewed from the front.

  First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 is the movable range of the switching member 5439a of the left slide member 6430 and the one-way clutch 5439 in the sixth embodiment, the position before displacement of the operating element 6438 and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not disposed between 6434a2 and 6434a2, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 87A, in the state before the left slide member 7430 slides, the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is disposed to be inclined to the right.

  In this case, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, while sliding the left slide member 7430 to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 abuts against the roller 7465 (a position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 is moved. The rotary member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operating element 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a side surface upper than the axial center of the roller 7465. Abut. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is inclined to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, the operation of the operation element is performed while biasing the roller 7465 downward by the slide displacement. 6438 can be rotated about the through hole 6438b as an axis.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a roller 7465 Contacts the side surface of the roller 7465 positioned at substantially the same height as the axial center of the roller.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, it is possible to rotate the operation element 6438 around the through hole 6438 b as an axial center while biasing the roller 7465 rightward by the slide displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is arranged to be inclined to the right, the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Be done.

  Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  Thus, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  In addition, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is rotated to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is in contact with a side surface lower than the axial center of the roller 7465 Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is inclined to the left, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the shaft portion 7463 having the roller 7465 inserted therein is slidingly displaced upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is positioned above the operating element 6438, the operating element 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Further, as described above, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is positioned to the right of the roller 7465 is in a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 blocks the rotation transmission. Can be maintained by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is caused.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operation element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is permitted and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is shut off. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 In the stopped state, rotation of the rotation member 5435 can form a third drive state in which the inertia force continues.

  Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Also, in this case, by stopping the inertia force in the third drive state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertia force does not act), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, A second driving state can be formed in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. . As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 to the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by a minute. As a result, the load of the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed displaceably along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is It is possible to change the position at which the permitted state is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the allowed state to the restricted state. Thereby, when the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced, the rotation position of the rotation member 5435 is changed, or the position at which the rotation member 5435 is rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 stopped. It can change according to a game state etc. As a result, a rendering effect can be heightened.

  Also, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and such second slide member 7460 is displaced by displacement. Since the role of effecting and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are both used, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed displaceably along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

  That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is disposed in one of the left and right directions of the left slide member 7430, with the left slide member 7430 being stopped, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other side By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

  Therefore, without sliding the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and along with the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 is rotated and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated. Two driving states can be formed.

  Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of slide unit 8400. FIG. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of slide unit 8400. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide rod disposed on the base member 8410. Mainly provided with a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the slide rod member 420. .

  The base member 8410 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction. Further, a projecting plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411.

  The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extended along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left sliding member 8430 are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 8430 is provided with a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in a front view which is suspended by the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 rotatably disposed. Front-view rectangular vertically-long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-view rectangular vertically-long base member depending on the second member 8433 8434, a third member 8445 having a rectangular shape in a front view and having a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed in the second member 8433, and a third side rack gear 8445a with which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed And a base member 8446 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape and hanging down on the third member 8445.

  The first member 8431 is provided with a slide hole having an inner peripheral surface of a circular cross section extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. In the axial direction of the sliding rod 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the slide rod member 420.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

  The second member 8433 is disposed on the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the first member 8431. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, a second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 8433. Thus, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

  The second side pinion gear 8433 d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

  The third member 8445 is disposed on the second member 8433 so as to be displaceable, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted into the slide hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the second member 8433. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the lower surface of the third member 8445. In addition, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is a second member by receiving the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is displaced relative to 8433.

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is A driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 8433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is The driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433 d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the third member 8445 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can.

  Next, the operation of slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, and the transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slide-displaced is illustrated. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a view taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93 (c). In FIG. 93, a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. The third member 8445 is disposed inside the

  In this case, the base member 8434 suspended to the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431 b suspended to the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed forward to the base member 8434 Be done.

  That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434 and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 slide, respectively, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434 and the base member 8446 can slide without interference. . In addition, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to achieve downsizing.

  Furthermore, since the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 can be reduced, the effect area K (FIG. 93A, the base member 8410) is formed in the center of the game board. (The overlapping region of the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446) can be secured.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the positive direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated. The left drive gear 471 engaged with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 meshing with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slide-displaced.

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412 is interposed, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the 433 a and the 433 a, the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433 The driving force associated with the exercise can be given. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 8433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state), thereby blocking It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  In addition, the third rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed in parallel to face each other, and both the third rack gear 8445a and the base rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in a combined state is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed, the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. It can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the third member 8445 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second member 8433 can slide relative to the first member 8431. In addition, the third member 8445 can slide relative to the second member 8433.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state). It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), in a state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the extended position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of the overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is disposed so as to protrude from the inner side of the second member 8433 leaving a partial overlap.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface of the left side in a front view of the base member 8431b depending on the first member 8431 and the side surface of the right side in a front view of the base member 8434 depending on the second member 8433 It is arranged at the same position. Further, the side surface on the left side in the front view of the base member 8434 suspended to the second member 8433 and the side surface on the right side in the front view of the substrate member 8446 suspended to the third member 8445 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction Ru.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed in the entire region of the effect area K.

  Next, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is suspended to the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended to the first member 431, and the second member 8433 is And a base member 9434 suspended therefrom. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide rod disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly comprises a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove.

  The left slide member 9430 is provided with a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, a base member 9431 b having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape suspended from the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 rotatably disposed. Front-view rectangular vertically-long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-view rectangular vertically-long base member depending on the second member 9433 Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape connected to the slide rail 9443 and a thread wire 9444 which can be freely deformed. Is configured.

  The first member 8431 is provided with a slide hole having an inner peripheral surface of a circular cross section extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. In the axial direction of the sliding rod 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the slide rod member 420.

  The base member 9431 b is formed with a recessed groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the upper side on the upper side in the front view left side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431 b 1 extending upward and downward inside the recessed groove. Formed (see FIG. 98).

  The second member 9433 is disposed displaceably to the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted into the slide hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the first member 8431. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 9433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c in which the front right side surface on the upper end side is cut away in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is disposed rotatably inside the notch 9434c. In the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443 to be described later is disposed on the front surface on the upper end side in a state in which the expansion and contraction direction is the left and right direction.

  The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and the position in the vertical direction is arranged substantially at the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed of two plates, and the plates are formed slidably. In addition, the slide rail 9443 has a coil spring (not shown) disposed therein, and is biased in the direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

  The base member 9437 is disposed slidably with respect to the second member 9433 by the rear surface side of the base member 9437 being fastened to the slide rail 9443.

  In the base member 9437, a concave groove recessed from the back side is formed on the side surface on the right side in the front view of the upper end portion, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446 a is disposed at a position substantially in the same direction as the connecting shaft 9431 b 1 of the first member 8431 in the vertical direction.

  The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, fishing line or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connection shaft 9431 b 1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connection shaft 9446 a of the third member 9533. The wire 9444 is connected between the base member 9431 b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434 d of the second member 9433 is connected to one end of the wire 9444. It arrange | positions in the state which the side and one part contact | abutted (refer FIG. 9).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and the transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slide-displaced is illustrated. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a view taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97 (c). In FIG. 93, a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are different in the longitudinal direction. Will be placed. Therefore, the base member 9431 b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can slide without interference. The space for disposing the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Furthermore, since the space for disposing the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 can be reduced, the effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

  When the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move leftward relative to the base member 9434 The sliding force acts, but the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434. 9446 can be prevented from sliding displacement with respect to the base member 9434 in the left direction.

  That is, by setting the length of the wire 9444 to the length in the left-right direction of the base member 9434 and the dimensions in the thickness direction of the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434 and the base member 9446, the base member A state in which the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 overlap in the front-rear direction can be maintained.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the positive direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and the left pinion gear The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 meshing with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slide-displaced.

  In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Can be applied to the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 9433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state), thereby blocking the screen. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  Further, in this case, the positions of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction are shifted. That is, the overlap dimension of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlap dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlap dimension L4 shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened as much as the overlap dimension of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slide-displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail 9443 as much as the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431 b is slide-displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slide-displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the base member 9434.

  Thus, the time required for sliding the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state) is shortened, and the shield state is obtained. It is possible to quickly switch the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the extended position, the side surface of the base member 9431b on the left side in front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in front view The side surfaces are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface on the left side in a front view of the base member 9434 and the side surface on the right side in a front view of the base member 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed in the entire region of the effect area K.

  In the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rails 9443 and the wire 9444. Therefore, as in the eighth embodiment, the third member 8445 is disposed on the upper portion of the base member 8446. There is no need to Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not disposed, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be made smaller, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 is suppressed to miniaturize. Can be

  Next, referring to FIGS. 99 to 102, a lifting unit 800 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the elevation unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. It is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and lowering unit 10800. As shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) disposed in the operation unit 200 are mutually disconnected at the combined (projected) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 10800) disposed in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. The same symbols are attached to the part of and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the lifting and lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment is formed to include a lifting and lowering member 10820 disposed on the base member 810 so as to be capable of lifting and lowering. The elevation member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes to the back side and an engagement portion 10822 that protrudes from the back side.

  The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion which is engaged with the respective rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state. It protrudes from the back side of the 10820. The engaging portion 10822 has its left-right dimension set substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435, 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed in the state protruded to the back side. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the respective rotation members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engagement portion 10822 (see FIG. 102A).

  Further, the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a rectangular shape so as to protrude from the rear surface side of the raising and lowering member 10820, and includes a through hole 10822a penetrating in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822 a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip of the projecting member 735 in top view. Accordingly, when the operation unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102B).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described. 101 is an operation unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is CIIb- in FIG. It is a schematic cross section of operation unit 10200 in a CIIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are in contact with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822 in the lifting unit 10800 (lifting member 10820) of the operation unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

  In the rear view, the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width dimension is reduced as it goes downward. That is, the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed to be inclined toward the center in the left-right direction as they go downward.

  Further, as described above, the projecting member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822 a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, on the back surface side of the projecting member 735, an inclined portion 10735a whose projecting distance is formed to be larger toward the lower side is formed, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed to be contactable. .

  Therefore, since the elevation unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projection unit 700 can be brought into contact (connected) by the engagement portion 10822, each movable unit (elevation unit 10800, slide in the combined state) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the projecting unit 700). As a result, since the player can be given a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700.

  More specifically, by causing the drive motor 891 for driving the elevating member 10820 to repeatedly exert a relatively small rotational drive in a reciprocating manner, the elevating member 10820 is vertically displaced (oscillated) by a relatively small distance.

  In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right sides (left and right in FIG. 99) of the engaging portion 10822. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

  At the combined (projected) position, a rotational moment is applied to the rotating members 435 and 455 in such a direction that the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 by the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 . Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can contact the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, it is possible to cause the rotating members 435 and 455 to perform cyclical repetitive displacement by the cyclical repetitive displacement of the elevating member 10820.

  On the other hand, in the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is in contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, periodical and repetitive displacement is given to the lifting and lowering member 10820. The inner surface of the through hole 10822 a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the Therefore, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (left direction in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced by the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a. As a result, the lift member 10820 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced by causing the lift member 10820 to be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, the drive energy can be suppressed as much as it is not necessary to apply a drive force to the other drive motors 763, 475, 476.

  That is, in the combined (projected) position, the rotating member 730 and the raising and lowering member 10820 formed to be able to abut on the rotating members 435 and 455 are provided, and the raising and lowering member 10820 is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. The periodic displacement of the lift member 10820 can be used to periodically displace the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455. In other words, it is possible to vibrate the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the lifting member 10820, thereby enhancing the rendering effect. . Further, in this case, the periodic displacement of the elevation member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing the members into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are separated (not in contact) with each other, cyclic displacement can be applied from the elevating member 10820 without being affected by each other. it can. That is, periodical displacement of the lifting and lowering member 10820 can be easily transmitted to the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, respectively.

  Furthermore, the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners without being associated with each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the rotation member 730 and the portion formed by the rotation members 435 and 455 in one character in a different manner. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount.

  For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed rotatably with respect to the base members 434 and 454, the cyclic displacement of the raising and lowering member 10820 causes a circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotational movement of the rotary member 730 can be periodically repeated, and by the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the projection member 735, the rotational member 730 can periodically repeat the pushing operation in the front-rear direction.

  Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the transmission of the driving force can be efficiently performed.

  That is, when the projecting members 735 are connected to the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force for displacing (vibrating) the projecting members 735 is transmitted through the rotating members 435 and 455. In the tenth embodiment, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the displacing (oscillating) driving source, thereby efficiently transmitting the driving force. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the elevation member 10820 is disposed at a position where the longitudinal direction position at the combined (projected) position is forward of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455, the elevator member 10820 is disposed closer to the player The lifting member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, vibrates the pattern (character) as a vibration source, it is possible to perform the effect of easily transmitting the force by the vibration to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.

  First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive unit 11761 in a state where the drive unit 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) is a second rotation of the drive unit 11761. It is a front view of the drive body 761 of the state arrange | positioned in position.

  In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving member 761 is lowered so that the interposition member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the driving member 761 for displacing the projecting member 735 to the projecting position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730). Although the case where 761 b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, with the rotation of the driving member 11761 for displacing the projecting member 735 to the extended position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730) The cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to ascend. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is provided on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the cam surface (position P1) to be abutted is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted to the sliding wall 733c in the state where the drive body 11761 is disposed at the second rotational position The cam diameter (radius R4) in the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

  Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is determined from the lowest position from the lowest position when the driving member 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position, the actuator 761 is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the largest diameter, and the interposing member 733 is pushed up to the top Accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the top.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, displacement modes will be described when the movable units (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) are displaced into the combined state. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIGS. 104 to 107, displacement modes when the movable units are displaced to the combined (projected) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position are sequentially illustrated.

  The operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. The tenth embodiment will be described as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid and displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projection unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of rotational displacement, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidingly displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slidingly displaced upward, and the tip of the rocking member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 at the initial position is disposed with the tip of the swinging member 732 in proximity to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension at the time of extension operation can be increased.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, displacement of the projecting unit 11700 is performed. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the projecting unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. The detailed description of the displacement of the elevation base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevation unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

  By the displacement of the second operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800 is the base The member 810 is displaced downward. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is accommodated in the rotating member 11730.

  Further, in this case, the tip end of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is at a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in the state in which the swinging member 732 is in proximity to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is placed in the combined (projected position), so that the rotating member 11730 rotates in the middle of the displacement to the combined position. Interference of the members 435 and 455 with the swinging member 732 can be suppressed. Therefore, the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (lifting member 820, rotating members 435 and 455, and rotating member 11730 is formed can be shortened to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is at the lowered position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435, The 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern (characters) formed by combining each member (rotation members 435 and 455, elevation base 11720 (rotation member 11730) and elevation member 820) of the movable units (slide unit 400, projection unit 11700 and elevation unit 800) ) Can be enlarged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 in accordance with the displacement.

  Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip end of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction of separating it from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is brought into the combined (projected) position, the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering members are separated by separating the tip of the swinging member 732 from the rotating member 11730). The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) has been described. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed in contact with the base member 410.

  In this case, the base member 410 is provided with an abutted portion, and the abutted portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to the dispersion of the dimensions of the second drive motor and the control of the left drive motor 475, etc. The member abuts (that is, the abutted member functions as a stopper for restricting the displacement of the left slide member 430). The first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 is brought into contact with the abutted member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact and suppressing the breakage of the both. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, in the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) that is the contact object (member against which the first member 431 is in contact) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case has been described where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), but it is not necessarily limited thereto. The object of contact of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational movement or a movement along a curve.

  Thus, if the contact object has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When the contact is abutted, the object to be abutted can be retracted (released) by the parallel displacement component described above, and the buffer action can be exhibited accordingly. In addition, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above by displacing the contact target in the opposite direction to the case of the contact, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting slide displacement from the stopped state can be assisted.

  The contact object does not have to be driven by the drive means. Instead of the drive by the drive means or in addition to the drive by the drive means, it is formed to be biased by biasing means (elastic material such as rubber or urethane, spring such as coil spring or torsion spring) Also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) is abutted, by elastically deforming the biasing means, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned shock absorbing action and, in addition, to the elastic recovery force. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 are arranged at substantially the same time at the extended position, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not a thing. For example, the upper displacing member 530 is first disposed at the overhanging position, and then the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position (ie, the lower abutment portion 643 is in contact with the upper abutment portion 533 in the stopped state). May be connected). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (reduction) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and rebounding occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacing member which is the contact object of the lower displacing member 640 (the object to which the lower displacing member 640 abuts (merges) at the extended position). Although the case where 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact object may be one that is stopped (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (reduction) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and rebounding occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position has been described as being the overhanging rotational position, It is not limited.

  For example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position may be set as the vertical rotational position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is taken as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to abut on the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. It is good.

  Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the extended position is the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). It may be a rotated position). That is, the state where the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position is taken as the overhanging position of the lower displacing member 640, and at the overhanging position, the lower displacing member 640 is the upper displacing member You may form so that it may be contact | abutted to 530. FIG.

  With any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened by the change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the rebound can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, although the lower displacing member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and another structure may be employed. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin is protruded from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and the guide pin can slide A structure is exemplified in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

  In the case of such a structure, the component of the displacement (speed) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward at least the contact object (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set to decrease at least near the overhanging position. Thus, as in the case of the first embodiment, a change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision), and suppresses the rebound. can do.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, only the lower combining unit 600 (lower displacing member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and alternatively or additionally, the upper unit 500 (upper displacing member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. It may be done. In this case, the lower combined unit 600 may be vertically inverted and disposed as the upper combined unit 500.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 may be increased or decreased (ie, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased. For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the other component of the velocity component of the upper displacing member 530 or the lower displacing member 640 decreases in the vicinity of the overhanging position. An example of reducing the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is illustrated. The target for reducing the supplied power may be either one or both of the drive motors 543 and 672.

  In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c in the interposed member 733 abuts on the cam surface of the cam portion 761b in the drive member 761 is the rotation of the drive member 761 in front view Although the case of being located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the driving body 761 It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposed member are rotated so that the driving member 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotational direction to raise the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733, Preferably, the weight of the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 is applied to the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weight of the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 and the protruding member 735.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of the predetermined range is preferably set corresponding to the angle required for the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swinging member 732 is started can be made coincident with the timing at which the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 has the upward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity) Has a downward displacement (velocity) component, and one of the rocking member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity) The case where the load on the drive motor 763 is equalized by forming the component so as to have a displacement (speed) component upward in the direction) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The cam portion 761 b of the drive body 761 The load on the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) in the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735.

  That is, in a region where the load required to exert the action from the cam portion 761b to the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the load necessary to exert the action from the sliding pin 761c to the sliding hole 735b is The shape of the slide hole 735b is set to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where a load required to exert an action from the slide pin 761c to the slide hole 735b is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761 b is set so that the load required to exert the effect from the cam portion 761 b on the moving wall 733 c becomes relatively small.

  Although the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as a biasing force in a direction to lower the projecting member 735 (slide downward) in the projecting unit 700 in the first embodiment, this is not necessarily the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may be made to act as a biasing force in a direction to move the projecting member 735 upward (slide displacement upward). In this case, the synergetic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above can increase the initial speed when the projecting member 735 is slidingly displaced upward from the stopped state.

  In the second embodiment, in the slide unit 2400, the transmission gear 2437a includes the teeth 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left of the rotation transmission member 2485 is The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, similarly to the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the meshed second drive state to the meshed meshed first drive state.

  Furthermore, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, which are disposed in the vertical direction. In this case, since the bulging portions are formed in the respective gears engaged with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive engaged with the second drive state in which the engagement is released Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

  Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portion in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases on both sides of the gear to be meshed, the thickness dimension (the dimension in the gear width direction) of the bulging portion can be formed small.

  In the second and third embodiments, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position in the center of the gaming machine) Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left slide members 430, 430 extend from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) When it is displaced to the center of the gaming machine, it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made small by forming small teeth, thereby making the rigidity thereof small. Although the case of raising the height has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the dimension of the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notch portions 4413a and 4414a may be formed large to increase the rigidity thereof.

  Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. Can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the slide unit 6400, the case where the projection 6411a for giving displacement to the operating element 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. And may be disposed to abut on the operation element 6438. That is, the position at which the protrusion 6411 a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on a member on the displacement trajectory of the operation element 6438.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position in the middle of the gaming machine) Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are retracted positions (positions on the left side of the gaming machine) The second drive state may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state when being displaced to the overhanging position (position at the center of the gaming machine).

  In the seventh embodiment, in the slide unit 7400, the roller 7465 for displacing the operation element 6438 is provided on the second slide member 7640. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. It may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, by forming the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d in the slide unit 8400 to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, the second member 8433 is the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are substantially the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583 d The distance between the second member 8433 relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 relative to the second member 8433 are smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance may be formed differently.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400 and 9400, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slidingly displaced to the effect area K, the effect area is produced. Although the case where K is made invisible is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, part or all of the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 may be used. Alternatively, it may be made of a light transmissive material, and part or all of the rendering area K may be seen through.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side in the front view of the base members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side in the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface of the base member 8434 and 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8446 and 9446 in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front and rear direction The side surface on the left side in the front view of the members 8431 b and 9431 b and the side surface on the right side in the front view on the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged to overlap in the front and rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the pivoting member 732 are in contact with each other is controlled or controlled. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both approach closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where the both constantly collide.

  In this case, since the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made to collide with the swinging member and be stopped, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, while it takes time to transmit the stopping operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacing operation, thereby quickly stopping at the combined (overhanging) position. can do.

  In the first embodiment, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is utilized when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 455 and the pivoting member 732, rotate the second members 436 456 disposed on the rotating members 435 455 in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. You may extend it.

  In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are disposed in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 to move the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720) The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 and the combined position can be easily increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (projecting) position. Although the case where it arrange | positions in the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the rotation members 435 and 455 and the rotation member 11730 (elevation base 720) may be arrange | positioned in the contact | abutting state . In this case, since the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotary members 435 and 455, the rotary member 11730 (lift base 720) and the lift member 820 are displaced to the united position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily enlarged.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 abut against the swinging member 732, the rotating member 730 rotates. Although the case of absorbing the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

  In this case, the rotary member 730 is connected to a transmission path for transmitting a drive for rotating the lift base 720, so that it is difficult to rotate the lift base 720 with respect to the lift base 720. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated by contacting with the swinging member 732 by rotating them, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

  In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 in contact with each other. Although the case where it arranges on the front side was carried out, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the whole of the portion in which the rotation member 435 was in contact with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arrange | positioned in the aspect which covers the front side of. Moreover, you may arrange | position to the front side of the area | region which exceeds this.

  In this case, the contact portion between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 can not be visually recognized from the player by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, and the rotating member 435 have one pattern. Can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player can not recognize the pattern (character) of the second effect mode and the interest is lost.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and an abutment member formed to be able to abut on the displacement member, the displacement member comprising the base It has a first member disposed linearly displaceably in the member, a pinion gear rotatably disposed in the first member, and a rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, and is linearly displaceable in the first member. The base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is engaged, and the first member of the displacement member is abutted against the contact member. A game machine A1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaced (e.g., JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member in displacement is brought into contact with the contact member, and the contact member is displaced together with the displacement member, or the contact member is disposed at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions or control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper), etc. Are known.

  However, in the conventional configuration described above, there is a problem that when the displacement member abuts on the contact member, the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be suppressed while securing the rendering effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  That is, the displacement member includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear through the pinion gear rotatably disposed in one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is larger than the first member. In the accelerated state, linear displacement can be made with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the rendering effect associated with the displacement can be secured. On the other hand, the displacement member brings the first member, which has a displacement speed lower than that of the second member, into contact with the contact member, weakens the impact at the time of contact and suppresses damage to the displacement member and contact member. can do.

  As a mode of driving the first member relative to the base member, for example, the rack gear formed on the first member is engaged with a pinion gear disposed on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The first member is a base member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member, or the tip end of an arm body whose proximal end is rotatably supported on the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven. For example, one that is linearly displaced with respect to

  Further, the abutment of the displacement member and the abutment member may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the projecting direction with respect to the first member, or It may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In any case, the first member, which has a displacement speed lower than that of the second member, abuts against the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is abutted. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is in a direction permitting displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. Since the direction in which the displacement member is displaced is permitted when the displacement member is displaced, the cushioning effect can be exhibited by receiving and displacing the displacement of the displacement member, and as a result, breakage of the displacement member and the abutment member Can be easily suppressed.

  The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is permitted means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component of the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, and may be a rotation or a curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A2, a movable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to a direction of linear displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displaceable member. At the time, the escaping operation of the abutting member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the buffer action can be reliably exerted, and breakage of the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

  A game machine A4 comprising: a guide member for guiding a linear displacement of the displacement member, wherein the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member. Can be implemented. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are juxtaposed at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. Therefore, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is correspondingly increased, resulting in an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, space efficiency can be improved and miniaturization can be achieved by using one of the guide members.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a game machine A5 characterized in that the contact member can be disposed at a position where it does not abut on the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the abutting member can be disposed at a position where it does not abut on the displacing member. A non-contacting state can be formed. That is, when the displacing member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, the stop position of the displacing member is likely to extend beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. When the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the abutment member is brought into contact with the member (the abutment member functions as a stopper), since the stop position of the displacement member can be easily matched with the target position. The displacement member and the non-contact position are disposed, and the contact frequency between the displacement member and the contact member is reduced by reducing the number of contacts by not allowing both to contact each other, and the life of those members is improved. Can be

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A5, an abutment member drive means for applying a driving force to the abutment member is provided, and the abutment member pushes back the displacement member by the drive force of the abutment member drive means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is displaceable in the direction.

  Here, the displacement member includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member By meshing the rack gear of the base member with the rack gear via the pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member can be moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member In the speed-up state, the force required for driving is relatively large because the structure is to linearly displace the base member. In particular, at the time of initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized by the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (speed of linear displacement from the stop state) is slowed, there is a possibility that the rendering effect accompanying the displacement may be inhibited.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, it is possible to assist the initial movement of the displacing member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the initial operation and to improve the rendering effect associated with the displacement.

  The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, and may be a rotation or a curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member abuts on the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, Since the first member abuts on the first member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, the contact member is brought into contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, so that the auxiliary force acts on the displacement member (first member) from the contact member. For a longer time (ie, from the time when the displacement member speed exceeds the velocity of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) after starting to push back the displacement member in the stopped state. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member A game machine A8 characterized by being set to a gear ratio larger than that of the pinion mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the abutting member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than that of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, the displacement member can be easily displaced linearly from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member can be increased, and as a result, the rendering effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

  That is, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited. Therefore, the force that pushes back the displacement member by the contact member is made stronger. It is possible to reliably assist the initial movement of the member (the start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state. On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member Speed can be increased.

  In addition, that gear ratio is large (small) means that the distance of the linear displacement of the rack gear at the time of one rotation of a pinion gear is large (small).

  Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member is delayed. That is, it is impossible in the prior art to simultaneously achieve the earlier operation of the displacement member and the increase in the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such coexistence is made possible for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower unit unit 600 an example>
A driving unit, a displacement member driven by the driving unit and displaceably formed to a first position, and an abutted member to which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts. In the gaming machine, at least a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position.

  Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are displaceable between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined distance and a contact position (first position) with which the two are in contact with each other. The gaming machine formed is known (for example, JP, 2015-51160, A). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the pair of displacement members retracted to the retraction position are displaced in a direction approaching each other and brought into contact (combined) at the contact position, whereby the pair of displacement members are integrated. The effect is to create a single character.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the pair of displacement members abut on each other in the first position, an impact occurs, and the attitude becomes unstable, for example, they bounce back each other. was there. On the other hand, when the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character is bulky and extends. The effect of the production is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. The occurrence of an impact when the displaced displacement member abuts on the abutted member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Further, since the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position, the displacement until reaching the vicinity of the first position is Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the abutted member to form one character, and it is possible to suppress interproportionation. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Further, the abutted member may be a member that is stopped at the first position, or may be a member that is displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is disposed at the first position prior to the displacing member (that is, the displacing member relative to the abutted member reaches the first position and is in the stopped state). May be abutted), and disposed at the first position substantially simultaneously with the displacing member (ie, the displacing member and the abutted member in a mutually displaced state are abutted at the first position) It may be

  Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases near the first position, the form in which the component in the direction toward the first position decreases continuously in the direction toward the first position The form etc. which combined these are illustrated.

  Further, the decrease in the component in the direction toward the abutted member means that the velocity in the direction toward the abutted member is zero as well as the velocity toward the abutted member is reduced, and This is intended to include the case where the velocity in the direction of separating from the abutted member increases (that is, the velocity in the direction toward the abutted member becomes negative).

  The gaming machine B1 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is one of the speed components of the displacement member in a state where the drive state of the drive means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means drives at least a portion of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state in which the driving state of the driving member is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, the control of the drive means can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  In addition, as a state where a drive state is made constant, for example, when a drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), the state where the supply current or supply voltage is made constant is illustrated. Ru. However, changes in state in transient response at the time of start and stop shall be ignored.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is disposed displaceably, and the transmission means is disposed at a position separated from the rotation base rotatably connected to the base member and a predetermined distance from the rotation base. And a connecting member having a connecting tip portion rotatably connected to the displacement member, wherein the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in a direction to bring the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. Thus, the displacement member is displaced toward the first position. A game machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the connection member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement trajectory of the connection tip portion of the connection member is a circular arc centered on the rotary base. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is imparted to the displacement member. In this case, the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in the direction to bring the connecting tip close to the first position, so that the first position of the velocity components of the displacement member (ie, the abutted member) The component in the heading direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means is provided with the connection member interposed between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connection member, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the transmission The structure of the means can be simplified.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is disposed displaceably, the transmission means includes a guide groove which is extended to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member is The guide groove includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is a component of the velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward at least the abutted member. Is formed so as to decrease near the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending in the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove, the guide groove being A component of at least the velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position. As described above, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means Structure can be simplified.

  One of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is movably connected to one side of the base member and is movably connected to the other side of the displacing member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the base member is provided with the interposition member in which one side is displaceably connected and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member through the transmission means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be exerted on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of the displacement by the action of the transmission means and the displacement by the action of the interposed member. Thereby, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B5, the interposed member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by pivotally supporting the one side and the other side.

  According to the gaming machine B6, since the interposed member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member by pivoting on one side and the other side, when the displacing member is displaced, the interposed member is disposed on the one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-like locus about the rotation center. Therefore, such an arc-like displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the interposed member member. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. Game machine B7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. Since the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the abutted member, the occurrence of an impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Because the displacement member in the first position has a component in the direction of separating from the abutted member, the displacement member displaced to the first position is abutted against the abutted member, Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of an impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Also, if the displacement member has a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member abuts on the abutted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions or control, etc., Since it is possible to increase the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value), it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of an impact.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the abutted member, and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contact member, The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is configured to have the velocity component of the abutted member in a state in which the driving state of the second drive means is constant. A game machine B9 characterized in that at least a component in a direction toward the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed displaceably toward the first position, so the effect by bringing the pair of members into contact Can increase the effect of For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacing member in the direction in which they adjoin each other and bringing them into contact (combined) at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the abutted member is provided, and the second transmission means is at least at least one of the velocity components of the abutted members. The component in the direction toward the displacing member is formed to decrease near the first position, thereby suppressing the occurrence of an impact when the abutted member displaced to the first position abuts on the displacing member it can. Thus, for example, it can be suppressed that the abutted member and the displacement member bounce back each other, and the postures of the abutted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Further, since the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the object is not moved until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time taken to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member. Can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the second transmission means is configured to reduce the decrease in the vicinity of the first position of at least the component in the direction toward the displacement member of the velocity components of the abutted members in a state where the drive state of the second drive device is constant. Since it can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the abutted member. Therefore, the control of the second drive means can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  The abutted member, the second drive means and the second transmission means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the drive means and the transmission means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the abutted member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Unit 700 as an Example>
Driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, first transmitting means and second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first and second members And the first transmission means includes a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the drive section, and the first drive to be loaded in the first predetermined section. And a second suppression unit configured to form a first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than a force is loaded on the driving unit, and the second transmission unit is configured to load a second driving force on the driving unit. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmission means is In the state where one predetermined section is formed, In a state in which the second transmission means forms the second suppression section at least in part and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section at least a part of the second predetermined section A game machine C1 characterized in that 1 transmission means forms the first suppression section.

  Here, the driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, and A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, JP-A-2015-53958). According to this gaming machine, since the two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one driving means, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost. However, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced by one driving means, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and there is a problem that the durability is lowered. The On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together can not be formed. The staging effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmitting means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section which can reduce the load of the driving means than the first predetermined section, and In a state in which the 2 transmission means can form the second predetermined section and the second suppression section capable of reducing the load of the driving means than the second predetermined section, and in the state where the first transmission section forms the first predetermined section, In a state in which the second transmission means forms a second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission section forms a second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section When one transmission means forms a first suppression section, that is, one is relatively high-loaded, the other is relatively low-loaded and the other is relatively high-loaded, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be dispersed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are displaced together, thereby reducing the load on the driving means. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is in contact with a cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to be the first member or And a cam rubbing member for applying a displacement to the second member, wherein the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined amount in the first suppression section or the second suppression section. A game machine C2 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion eccentrically located from the rotational center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides and the displacement of the first member or the second member by the pin portion sliding along the guide groove. The displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section A game machine C3 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement of the crank contact member.

  According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. The unit rotation of the cam member and the crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (the distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (abrasive surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (the distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member in the vicinity can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to apply a change to the speed of displacement of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is generated in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member, and the rendering effect is enhanced while the first or second suppression is performed. In the section, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section 2) A game machine C4 characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member in the suppression zone includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes the displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member is provided with a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, the first weight of the first member or the second member is used to The load of the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be smaller than the load of the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

  Further, as described above, by changing the load of the drive means using the weight of the first member or the second member, for example, interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the crank member and the crank rubbing member As in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member when changing the load of the drive means, and the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is abraded against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to impart displacement to the first member. And a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion, and the crank A crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and the displacement of the second member by the pin portion sliding along the guide groove; and the cam member and the cam member A game machine C5 characterized in that it is integrally formed with a crank member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, since the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, a space for separately arranging the cam member and the crank member Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, compared with the case where it forms separately, the shift | offset | difference of the displacement of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be suppressed, and the precision of synchronization of both members can be raised.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first member or the second member, or the first member or the second member does not transmit. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is possible to form a non-transmission section for keeping the two members in a stopped state, and displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means does not drive the driving means to the first member or the second member. It is possible to form a non-transmission section which maintains the first member or the second member in the stop state as transmission, and since the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, it is in the stop state. The first member or the second member can be displaced smoothly.

  That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the drive means becomes large under the influence of the inertia force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. Where it is difficult to displace smoothly, since there is provided a non-transmission section for keeping the first member or the second member in the stopped state by not transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first member or the second member, In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled and energized, and after application of force (i.e., after passing through the non-transmission section), displacement of the first member or the second member can be initiated. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission sections, and displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through the respective non-transmission sections. Game machine C7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, both of the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form non-transmission sections, and after passing through the respective non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and in the meanwhile, the drive means can be idled with a small load. As a result, the force of the drive means can be made stronger, and the first member or second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, in a state where one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the gravity direction. A game machine C8 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member Since the first component has a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, when displacing the other while maintaining one of the first member or the second member in the stopped state, the driving force necessary for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the force of the drive means can be made stronger, and the first member or second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Also, while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced, so both the first member and the second member stop. The effect can be improved by avoiding the state.

  In any one of game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides, the pin portion sliding along the guide groove imparts displacement to the first member or the second member And a section in which a guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with a rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and a pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached the predetermined position of the guide groove changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section To be If, before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission interval, the gaming machine rotation of the crank member is characterized in that it is stopped C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in a circular arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member The pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin section that has reached the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section In the case of sliding in the direction, since the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

  That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank contact member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be made non-transferable (can form a non-transfer section). In the structure in which the guide part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin section passes through the non-transmission section and is turned at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank contact member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load on the Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid that the load of the drive means becomes excessive.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 2400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause slide displacement, the slide member is rotatable And a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotation member, wherein the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotation member. A game machine D1 capable of forming a state not converted into exercise.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause slide displacement. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-236802). There is also known a gaming machine in which a slide member is provided with a rotary member and drive means for driving (rotating) the rotary member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotationally move the rotary member disposed on the slide member while slidingly displacing the slide member (linear motion), thereby performing effects combining linear motion and rotational motion. Can.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the rotary member and the drive means for driving the rotary member are provided on the slide member, the weight as a whole of the slide member is increased, and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotary member provided rotatably on the slide member and the conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotary member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a drive means for driving (rotate) the rotation member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced accordingly, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement) The load on the driving means for

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, since the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member, only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member Instead, for example, it is possible to form a configuration in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotation member is not rotated. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the slide member and the rotary member can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A game machine D2 comprising: a pinion gear; and release means formed so as to be able to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear and disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably mounted on the slide member. In the state in which the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational movement of the rotation member by the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member. Further, since the converting means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. That is, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slide-displaced while the rotary member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motion (linear and rotational) can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the releasing means is provided on the base member, and there is no need to provide means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates the portion of the base member at which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby meshing the rack gear with the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by releasing.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates the rack gear by rotating at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for the rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the downsizing can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction. The above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the reverse direction after at least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear and the gear engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged with each other, such engagement can be smoothly performed.

  In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A game machine D5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-described portion of the base member is displaced in the reverse direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a pinion gear, and a tooth is missing at a part of the rack gear.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

  In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in part, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth missing portion of the rack gear . That is, according to the present configuration, the rotary member can be rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion where the teeth of the rack gear are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear can be rotated. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the portion where the dropout is missing, the rotation of the rotary member can be continued by its inertia force.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the state in which the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped The form in which the rotation member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the slide member and the rotation member can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine D6, the teeth engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released by removing some teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Therefore, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D6, a tooth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear is made more rigid than other teeth.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear are made more rigid than the other teeth, so the durability is improved. Can be That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing part collide with the teeth of the pinion gear which has passed the part where the teeth of the rack gear are missing, so that the durability is improved by making the rigidity high. be able to.

  In addition, as a means to raise rigidity, the form which enlarges the tooth width of a tooth is illustrated, for example. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without deteriorating the meshing property with the pinion gear.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a one-way clutch disposed in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, the one-way clutch changing between a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is interrupted A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

  In this case, since the one-way clutch is formed so as to be able to change the state of permitting rotation transmission and the state of disconnection, changing the one-way clutch to a state of cutting off rotation transmission causes the slide displacement to rotate. It is possible to form a state which is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, the one-way clutch is in a state of permitting transmission of rotation, and not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking transmission of rotation The slide member is changed to a state in which the slide member is slide-displaced while non-rotation does not occur, or to a state in which the one-way clutch allows transmission of rotation when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member can form a form that is continued by its inertial force.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the slide member is slid while the rotary member is not rotated It is possible to form the displacement form or the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member stopped, and the number of combinations of movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the slide member and the rotary member It can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the slide member and drive means for driving the displacement member and disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A game machine D9 comprising: an operation element operated to change a state of permitting and a state of interruption, the operation element being operated by the displaced displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D8, the displacement member disposed displaceably on the slide member and the drive means for driving the displacement member and disposed on the slide member are provided. In addition to the movement of the slide member and the rotation member (linear movement and rotation movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the operation element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can share the role of rendering by displacement and the function of operating the operation element. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with means for operating the operation element of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operation element operated to change a state of permitting transmission of rotation and a state of interrupting rotation, and the base member is used for sliding the slide member. A game machine D10, comprising: an engagement portion positioned on a displacement trajectory of the operation element, wherein the operation element is operated by the engagement portion when the slide member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, the base member includes the engaging portion positioned on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slidingly displaced, and the sliding member is engaged when slidingly displaced. Since the operating element is operated by the joint portion, there is no need to provide means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (i.e., operating the operating element) on the slide member, and accordingly, the weight of the slide member as a whole Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In addition, as long as the arrangement position of an engaging part is on the displacement locus of the above-mentioned operation element, it may be any position. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement trajectory, or may be halfway on the displacement trajectory.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause a slide displacement, and the second slide A game machine D11 characterized in that the position of the engagement portion is changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member so as to be changeable along with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, i.e. the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permitted state. Thereby, the position where the rotational state of the rotary member is changed when the slide member is slide displaced, and the position where the rotary member is rotated in a state where the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped are, for example, according to the gaming state. It is possible to change, as a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the role of the second slide member performing the rendering by displacement. Since the position of the engaging portion is also changed, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause a slide displacement, and the second slide A game machine D12 characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable between a position at which the operation element can be operated and a position at which the operation element can not be operated in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operating element can be operated and the position where the operation can not be performed with the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched when the slide member is slidingly displaced. That is, a mode in which the rotational state of the rotary member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotary member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the role of the second slide member performing the rendering by displacement. Since the position of the engaging portion is also changed, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be disposed on the second slide member, or may be disposed on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be disposed displaceably on the base member, and the second slide member may displace the engaging portion directly or indirectly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 8400 as an Example>
In the gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding opening means capable of forming an opening state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding opening means is A first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear And a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first side pinion gear, and having a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaced. Since the two members are linearly displaced to one side, the shielding state is formed, and the first and second members are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. An open state is formed Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shield state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an open state for opening the predetermined area. For example, in JP 2011-156058A, a plurality of plate-shaped rotary plates are rotatably disposed in a predetermined area, and the predetermined area is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotary plates to the front. On the other hand, each rotating plate is rotated by 90 degrees and the plate thickness part (side surface) is directed to the front, thereby providing a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state) Is disclosed.

  However, according to the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if an open state is formed, each rotary plate in a state in which the plate thickness portion (side surface) is directed to the front remains in the predetermined area. However, there has been a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotary plate is reduced, there is a limit to the reduction in thickness in order to secure the strength at the time of rotation.

  On the other hand, one plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area is disposed displaceably, and the plate-like body is displaced (arranged) to the predetermined area to shield the predetermined area (shield On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (an open state is formed) is also known by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area (displacement from the predetermined area). There is. According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area.

  However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-like body retracted from the predetermined area. There is a problem that it becomes necessary and causes an increase in size. Moreover, since it is a plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract such a plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the retracted area from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielding state and the opening state.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shield opening means includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and A base-side rack gear having a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and a base member formed on the base member and engaged with the first side pinion gear And the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, an open state is formed.

  That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. In addition, since the first member and the second member are overlapped when the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined areas are disposed accordingly Space can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. The time required to retract the second member from the predetermined area or to arrange the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and switching between the shielding state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  In the shielding state in which the predetermined area is shielded, the entire area of the predetermined area does not have to be completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and an area opened to a part of the predetermined area May exist. Similarly, in the open state in which the predetermined area is opened, the entire area of the predetermined area does not have to be completely open, and a part of the predetermined area may be part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielding state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state. In other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielding state.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion, and the second member is configured to A second body portion having the second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion connected to the second body portion A game machine E2 characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. And a second body portion coupled to the second body portion, the second body portion having a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. And a second displacement portion, wherein the first body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region, so that when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side In the above, only the locus of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined area. That is, it is possible to prevent the first body portion and the second body portion from passing outside the predetermined area, and to prevent the locus from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined area, The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely released.

  In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means comprises a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body of the first member comprises a first side rack gear engaged with the drive gear. A game machine E3 characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes the drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first side rack gear engaged with the drive gear is a first member The first member has a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear, so the structure for linearly displacing the first member is compact. Can be That is, of the space necessary outside the predetermined area of the base member, the space other than the space necessary for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear A game machine E4 having a third side rack gear to be meshed and a third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear And the third side rack gear engaged with the second side pinion gear, and the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the second When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with displacement of the second member, and the second member is displaced to the other side with linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is displaced linearly, the third member can be displaced linearly to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

  Therefore, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be disposed in a predetermined area by linear displacement toward one side of the first member, the second member, and the third member to form a shielding state. With linear displacement to the other side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) ), Can form an open state.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. Further, in a state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member retracted from these predetermined areas. The space for disposing the member, the second member, and the third member can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) in this manner, comparison with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by two members Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area can be made smaller if the three divided areas are overlapped than when the predetermined area divided into two areas is overlapped.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member, and Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a further accelerated state, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area or from the retracted position Switching between the shielding state and the opening state can be performed more quickly by reducing the time required to place in a predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear on which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and a third main body portion supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third body portion A game machine E5 comprising: a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third rack gear engaged with the second pinion gear and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first Only trajectories of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion and the third main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and it is possible to prevent the locus from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and the first member, the second member, and the third area are formed in the predetermined area. Since no part of the member remains, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely released.

  Note that the technical idea (the relationship of the third member to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be expanded to be a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member,.

  That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. The shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the nth member and the meshing of the base side rack gear is provided by expanding the configuration including the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member. It is also possible to further include an n-th side pinion gear to be made and an n + 1-th member having an (n + 1) th side rack gear meshed with the n-th side pinion gear and linearly displaceable on the n-th member ( (Where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is connected to the third body portion supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and the third body portion Extending the configuration of including the third displacement portion, the n + 1th member has an n + 1th rack gear engaged with the nth side pinion gear and an n + 1th main portion supported linearly displaceably by the nth member And an (n + 1) th displacement portion connected to the (n + 1) th main portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the first member and the second member face one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with relative displacement between the first member and the second member when being displaced linearly. A gaming machine E6 to be.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted.

  That is, by linear displacement to one side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state. With linear displacement to the other side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) ), Can form an open state.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. Further, in a state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member retracted from these predetermined areas. The space for disposing the member, the second member, and the third member can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Note that, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) in this manner, comparison with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by the two members Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area is smaller when the three divided areas are overlapped than when the predetermined area divided into two areas is overlapped.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilizing means linearly displaces the third member in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is accelerated by an amount corresponding to the acceleration of the second member. Linear displacement can be accelerated more than at least the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member and the third member from the predetermined area or for arranging the first member, the second member and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened to switch between the shielding state and the opening state It can be done quickly.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevation unit 800 are an example>
In the gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member which are formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. The game machine F1 is disposed at the overhanging position by being disposed, and being displaced in a mode including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member formed to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, for example (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are respectively displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to or into contact with each other to associate them (integrated) An effect of causing the player to visually recognize as one character is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the 1st member and the 2nd member in a large size.

  However, in the prior art described above, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhanging position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the overhanging position is obtained. There is a possibility that the two may interfere with each other on the way of displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can not be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. There was a problem that the staging effect was hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is disposed at the overhanging position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced in a mode including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position. As a result, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other in the middle of displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed can be shortened, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed at the overhanging position by being displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed at the overhanging position by being displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the curved shape is formed. Can form a locus of Therefore, interference with the first member can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the second member to the overhanging position.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, and is thus displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. Game machine F3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the linear base member which is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are achieved. And the second member can be easily suppressed from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the overhanging position, and the attitude of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhanging position by linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not moved to the overhanging position, but It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, since the attitude of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the attitude at the extended position, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the second member at the retracted position can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device disposed in the gaming area, and the retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area A game machine F4 characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long attitude at the overhanging position and in a vertically long attitude at the retracted position.

  Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed into a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhang position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character can not be formed, and a rendering effect is sufficiently achieved. I can not demonstrate. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, while the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the member installation space It is difficult to secure Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it has been necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is disposed in a horizontally long attitude at the overhanging position, and is disposed in a vertically long attitude at the retracted position. Therefore, the second member can be increased in size by effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device, and as a result, the character formed with the first member at the overhanging position Can be made larger.

  The gaming machine F3 is characterized by comprising: driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement; and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member And, since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be enhanced. As a result, interference with the first member can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the second member to the overhanging position.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide drive means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed larger accordingly, and the character formed with the first member can be further enlarged at the overhang position. . For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is evacuated to the area The second member can be formed large while setting the position.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the game machine comprises a third member formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, the third member being the first member and the second member in the overhanging position A game machine F6 characterized by being arranged with different positions in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, since the third member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, the first member and the second member In addition, a larger character can be formed, and the effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is disposed at a position where the first and second members are different from each other in the front-rear direction at the extended position, the third member does not abut on the first and second members at the extended position. That is, in the case where the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhang position or there is a possibility of coming into contact, the third member is required to set the displacement speed in consideration of breakage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form an aspect such as displacing the subsequent third member so as to catch up with the first member and the second member at the overhang position, and to improve the rendering effect when forming the character. .

  In the game machine F6, a game machine F7 characterized in that the third member is provided with an overhang portion which is formed so as to project to the same position as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction.

  Here, when the positions of the first and second members and the third member are different in the front-rear direction, the size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is increased by that amount. If the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the first member, the second member, and the third member are respectively reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the dimension in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to ensure rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member includes the overhanging portion formed to project to the same position as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction, so that the entire (first member And the second member and the third member), while reducing the size of the gaming machine in the back and forth direction, while increasing the dimension in the front and back direction of the third member, and securing its rigidity can do.

  A game machine F8 comprising an abutted member disposed on the first member in any one of the game machines F1 to F7 and having a part of the second member abutted at an extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member is provided with the abutted member to which a part of the second member abuts at the overhang position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

  The abutted member may be formed at a position at which the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the extended position, or the first member and When the second member is disposed at the overhanging position, the second member may be formed in a position where the second member abuts when both approach closer than the reference position due to control variation and dimensional variation.

  In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the abutted member is separated from the first member Game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in the overhang position.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed displaceably in the direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is the first abutted member. Since it arrange | positions in the extended position in the state spaced apart from the member, the reliable contact with the 2nd member in the extended position can be enabled. Further, at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger because the abutted member is displaced in the direction to be separated from the first member.

  In the gaming machine F9, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the abutted member is displaced in the direction approaching the first member after the first member is placed at the overhanging position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, after the first member is disposed at the overhanging position, the abutted member is displaced in the direction approaching the first member, so that the second A space can be formed for displacement of the member. That is, when the first member is disposed at the overhanging position, the abutted member is separated from the first member, and the first member is made to receive the displacement of the second member, and thereafter, to the first member The abutted member is displaced in the direction in which it abuts, and the space formed along with the displacement can be used as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect of the second member can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

  In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first abutted member at least in the retracted position is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that the game machine is placed in proximity to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed displaceably in the direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least at the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being in proximity to the first member, the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position can be suppressed. In addition, when the abutted member is displaced in the direction of separating from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that much.

  In the gaming machine F11, the gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the abutted member is maintained in a state of being in proximity to the first member until the first member is placed at the overhanging position. .

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the abutted member is in proximity to the first member until it is arranged at the overhang position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress interference of the abutted member with the second member in the middle of the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, the time until the character is formed can be shortened, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the abutted member are provided, and in one set, when the second member is abutted against the abutted member, the abutment thereof The game machine is characterized in that, in the other group, the abutted member is formed to be displaced toward the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the abutted member are provided, and in one set, the second member corresponds to the abutted member When contacted, the abutted member is formed to be displaced toward the second member in the other set with the contact, so that, for example, in one set, the second member is at the reference position When being displaced beyond A and abutted against the abutted member, the abutted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set along with the abutment. Therefore, in the other set, the abutted member is abutted against the second member, so that the impact due to the contact of the second member with the abutted member in one set is received only by the first member. Instead, the second member in the other set can also be received. Thereby, kinetic energy can be dispersed, displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  As a structure in which the abutted members in the other pair are displaced toward the second member in accordance with the abutment in one pair, for example, the displacement of the abutted members in one pair is subjected to the afflicted members in the other pair A structure which is transmitted to the abutting member and the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member according to the transmission, and the displacement of the abutted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, With the transmission, the first member is displaced, whereby the abutted members in the other set are displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure combining these, etc. Is illustrated.

  In any one of gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position and is capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed to be able to abut on the first member and the second member at the overhang position. Since the cyclic displacement can be formed, the cyclic displacement of the cyclic displacement member can be used to periodically displace the first member and the second member. That is, the character formed by the first member and the second member and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the rendering effect. Further, in this case, the periodic displacement members share the periodic displacement by bringing the members into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first and second members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the extended position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

  In the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is disposed at a position where the longitudinal position in the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, the cyclic displacement member is disposed at a position where the longitudinal position in the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. The member (periodically displacing member) disposed on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the near side which is easy for the player to visually recognize as the vibration source, it is possible to perform the effect of easily transmitting the powerful force by the vibration to the player.

  In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14 or F15, since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, cyclic displacement of the periodic displacement member Transmission to one member and the second member can be facilitated. In addition, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes without being associated with each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the first member of one character and the portion formed by the second member in different modes. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, it is possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 700, and the lower combining unit 800 as an example>
A first group of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and a second group consisting of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position And when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhang position, a first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and the second group of In the gaming machine in which the second effect mode is formed by the respective displacement means of the second group when the respective displacement means is disposed at the overhang position, one of the displacement means of the first group and the one or more of the first group. A game machine G1 comprising a combination means which doubles as one displacement means in the second group.

  Here, the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position A gaming machine provided with a second group is known (e.g., JP-A-2014-176578).

  According to this gaming machine, when the respective displacement means of the first group are arranged at the overhanging position, the respective displacement means of the first group are associated (integrated) to form one character (first character) When each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position while making the player recognize it as the effect aspect), the respective displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated), and another character is An effect of causing the player to be recognized as (the second effect mode) is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the first group is disposed to the overhanging position, the respective groups of the first group are The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is extended to the overhanging position By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area is performed by the respective displacement means of the second group.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the displacement means of the first group and the displacement means of the second group to be large, respectively.

  However, if a plurality of characters (representation modes) are formed as in the above-described prior art, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters also increases accordingly, and each displacement means is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to upsize each displacement means because the area (space) to be kept is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (representation mode).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the combined means is used which combines one displacement means in the first group and one displacement means in the second group, a plurality of them (the It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second) presentation modes, and to enlarge each displacement means. As a result, each rendering mode (character) can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine G1, the combined use means is a position where the overhanging position disposed when forming the first effect mode is different from the overhanging position disposed when forming the second effect mode. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being.

  Here, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are formed when the combination means is disposed at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (shared means) is used in the effect mode, and the interest is hindered. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively using the combined means arranged at the same position (the overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form the difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the combination means also forms the overhanging position disposed when forming the first effect mode, and the second effect mode Since the extension position to be placed is different from the position at which the player is placed, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that such combined means is shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the combination means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the degree of freedom can be enhanced, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combination means is characterized in that the attitude at the time of forming the first effect mode and the attitude at the time of forming the second effect mode are different. Gaming machine G3.

  Here, in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common if the combined means has the same posture. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the displacing means (shared means) is being used, and inhibits interest. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the same means with the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. This makes it difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) with the effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combined means has an attitude when forming the first effect mode and an attitude when forming the second effect mode Can be made difficult for the player to recognize that such combined means are shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest . In addition, the degree of freedom can be enhanced as long as the dual purpose means can be different postures in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means may back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. A game machine G4 characterized in that directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

  Here, the combination means has different overhanging positions or (and) different postures when the first effect mode is formed and the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stop states. Because of the necessity, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stop state (arrangement position or (and) posture) is likely to vary accordingly. In this case, in a structure in which the dual purpose means abuts one displacement means at the overhang position (at least a part of the longitudinal direction matches), the disposition position or posture of the dual purpose means does not reach the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacing device and the displacing device, one displacing device is pushed out to cause a positional deviation when the disposition position or posture of the combined device exceeds the target position. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is disposed at the overhanging position at the time of forming the first effect mode, the first group of For at least one of the displacing means, the position in the front-rear direction is different, and at least a part overlaps in front view, so that even when the stop state (the overhang position or (and) posture) varies, The relationship between the displacement means and the combined means can be easily maintained. That is, by partially overlapping in a front view, even when displacement of the combined means is insufficient, formation of a gap with one of the displacement means can be suppressed, and the combined position is different. Even when the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress that one displacement means is pushed out to cause positional deviation. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association between the one displacement means and the combined means.

  In the gaming machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. Game machine G5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since the single displacement means and the other displacement means are associated (integrated) with each other, the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  In this case, as described above, the combination means is likely to cause variation in the stopped state (the overhang position or (and) posture), and such a combination means is at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. In the structure in which the first displacement means is in contact (at least a part of which has the same position in the front-rear direction), the gap between the second means and the first displacement means does not reach the target position. Is formed to inhibit association (unification). Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause positional deviation, so that association (unification) is inhibited. That is, when the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different, and the front view In the above, some overlap is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine G5, the combined means is positioned forward of the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the front-rear direction when disposed at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G6 characterized in that the first displacement means and the other displacement means overlap in a front view with respect to a portion in which the first displacement means and the other displacement means abut each other.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the combination means is more than one displacement means and the other displacement means when disposed at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. Since the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap in a front view with respect to the portion abutted against each other while being located on the front side in the front-rear direction, for example, one displacement means or (and) other displacement means When a gap is formed between the two displacement means due to the occurrence of a deviation at the target position, the gap can be shielded by the dual means to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the one displacement means and the other displacement means from being blocked, and to easily maintain the association between both the displacement means and the combined means.

  In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, the linear base member is linearly displaced, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, thereby combining rotational displacement and linear displacement. An overhanging position of the combined means which is displaced in a mode and is disposed when forming the first effect mode, and an overhanging position of the combined means which is disposed when forming the second effect mode Are different positions, and the posture of the combination means at the time of forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combination means at the time of forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a linear base member which is linearly displaced, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member. Since the displacement and the displacement are combined in the combined manner, it is possible to increase the freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first rendering manner or the second rendering manner.

  In the gaming machine G7, a longitudinal direction position of one displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G7, the front-back direction position of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combination means. By positioning the means closer to the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to make the longitudinal direction positions of one displacing means and the combined means closer. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) one displacement means with the combination means.

  In the gaming machine G8, in a state in which one of the first group of displacement means and the combination means are disposed at the retracted position, the one displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping with the linear base member in front view Game machine G9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G8, one displacement means and the linear base member are in a state in which one displacement means and combination means in the first group are disposed at the retracted position. Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position so as to form the first effect mode, they are arranged at the overlapping position in the front view, the one displacement means is linear Contact with the side surface of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G9, in a state in which the other displacement means of the first group and the combined means are disposed at the retracted position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position not overlapping the linear base member in front view And the other displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view while the other displacement means and the combined means are displaced toward the overhanging position, and the linear base member is A game machine G10 characterized in that at least an area where the other displacement means overlap in a front view is smaller in dimension in the front-rear direction than an area where the one displacement means overlaps in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, in a state where the other displacing means and combination means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacing means face the linear base member The displacement member is disposed at a position not overlapping in view, and in the middle of displacement of the other displacement means and the combination means toward the extended position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping in a front view with the linear base member In order to form the first effect mode, the area in which at least the other displacement means overlap in front view has a smaller dimension in the front-rear direction than the area in which one displacement means overlaps in front view. And when a linear base member (combination means) is displaced to an extended position, it can control that other displacement means abuts on the side of a linear base member.

  The gaming machine G10 includes driving means for applying driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means, the conversion mechanism comprising A game machine G11 characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base members is disposed in an area overlapping in a front view at a retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G10, driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual means Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the combined means can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the combined means with respect to the linear base member can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the displacing means with the combined means.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the dual purpose means, the dual purpose means can be made larger accordingly, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the member means is evacuated to the area The combined means can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In this case, the conversion mechanism is disposed in an area where one displacement means of the linear base members overlaps in a front view at the retracted position, and accordingly, another area of the linear base members (the conversion mechanism is not disposed Area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it can be suppressed that the other displacement means abuts on the side surface of the linear base member.

  A gaming machine K1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16 and G1 to G11. . Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16 and G1 to G11. K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16 and G1 to G11, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A game machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is formed displaceable between a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between a retracted position and an extended position, and between the retracted position and the extended position. There is known a gaming machine provided with a second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).
However, in the gaming machine described above, it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enlarging each displacement means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 comprises a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the retraction position and the overhanging position And a second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between each of the displacement means of the first group, each displacement means of the first group being arranged in the overhanging position The first effect aspect is formed by the means, and the second effect aspect is formed by the displacement means of the second group when each displacement means of the second group is disposed at the overhanging position And means for combining the one displacement means of the first group and the one displacement means of the second group.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the combined means is an overhanging position arranged when forming the first effect mode, and the second effect mode. And the overhanging position to be disposed when forming the.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the combination means forms an attitude at the time of forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The posture at the time of doing is different.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, each displacement means can be upsized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress inhibition of interest.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 3rd Symbol Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
100-104 substrate box 400 slide unit (part of first county, part of second county)
410, 2410, 3410, 6410, 7410, 8410 Base member 6411 Protrusion (engagement portion)
412 Base rack gear (rack gear)
413, 4413 Left rotation transmission rack gear 4413a, 4414a Notch part (missed part)
4413b, 4414b Small teeth (teeth adjacent to the missing part)
414, 4414 Right rotation transmission rack gear 420 sliding rod member (guide member)
430, 2430, 5430, 6430, 7430, 8430, 9430 Left slide member (displacement member, slide member)
431, 8431 first member (first main body)
431a First side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
8431b Base member (first displacement part)
432 First side pinion gear (pinion gear)
432a Second rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
433, 8433, 9433 second member (second main body)
433a Second side rack gear (rack gear)
8433d second side pinion gear 434 base member (linear base member , first member )
8434, 9434 Base member (second displacement portion)
435 Rotatable member (shared means)
435, 454, 5435, 5455 Rotating member (second member)
437a, 457a, 2437a, 2457a Transmission gear (pinion gear)
5439 one-way clutch 5439a switching plate (operation element)
9444 Wire (means for using relative displacement)
8445 Third member (third main body)
8445a Third side rack gear 8446, 9446 Base member (third displacement portion)
450, 2450, 5450, 6450, 7430 Right slide member (contact member, slide member)
454 Base member (Linear base member)
455 Rotating member (second member)
471 Left drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
472 Right drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
476 Right drive motor (contact member drive means)
475 Left drive motor (drive means)
476 Right drive motor (drive means)
500 upper unit (part of the second county)
530 Upper displacement member (member to be abutted)
600 Lower unit (part of the second group)
610 Base member 630 drive arm (connection member)
631 Support hole (rotation base)
633 Connection hole (connection tip)
640 Lower displacement member (displacement member)
700 projecting units (part of the first county)
7460 second slide member 7465 roller (engagement portion)
7466 Motor (2nd drive means)
650 connecting arm (intermediate member)
672 Drive motor (drive means)
720 Lifting base (part of the first member)
730 Rotating member (part of the first member)
732 Swinging member (first member or second member, non-contacting member)
733 Interposition member (cam rubbing member)
733c Sliding wall (part of first transmission means or part of second transmission means)
735 Protruding member (second member or first member, crank contact member)
735b Sliding hole (part of second transmission means or part of first transmission means, guide groove)
735b1 Curved part (non-transmission section)
761 Drive body (cam member, crank member)
761b Cam part (part of the first transmission means or part of the second transmission means)
761c Sliding pin (part of second transmission means or part of first transmission means, pin part)
763 Drive motor (drive means)
800 lift units (part of the second county)
820 Lifting member (third member, cyclic displacement member)
871 Second slide member (projected part)
Vv Upward velocity component (component in the direction to the abutted member)

Claims (2)

The first group of displacing means includes a first group of displacing means, and the second group of displacing means includes a plurality of displacing means, each displacing means of the first group being When placed in the position, each displacement means in the first group forms a first effect aspect, and when each displacement means in the second group is placed in the second position, the second group In the gaming machine in which the second effect mode is formed by each displacement means of
Means for combining one of the displacement means in the first group and means for displacing one of the second group, a first member on which the means is used, and the first And driving means for applying a driving force to a member to displace the first member,
The combined means is formed to be displaced relative to the first member in conjunction with the displacement of the first member ,
In the first position, the combined means can come in contact with at least one of the displacement means of the first group,
In the second position, the displacement means of the second group which are not in contact with the combined means can come in contact with each other, and at least a part of the contact portion of the displacement means of the second group and the gaming machine and combined means and said Rukoto is disposed at a position overlapping in the front view.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box.

Images